Professional Documents
Culture Documents
(London Mathematical Society Lecture Note Series) Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei, Minhyong Kim - Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations - Volume 1-Cambridge University Press (2014)
(London Mathematical Society Lecture Note Series) Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei, Minhyong Kim - Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations - Volume 1-Cambridge University Press (2014)
(London Mathematical Society Lecture Note Series) Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei, Minhyong Kim - Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations - Volume 1-Cambridge University Press (2014)
The titles below are available from booksellers, or from Cambridge University Press at
http://www.cambridge.org/mathematics
287 Topics on Riemann surfaces and Fuchsian groups, E. BUJALANCE, A.F. COSTA & E. MARTÍNEZ (eds)
288 Surveys in combinatorics, 2001, J.W.P. HIRSCHFELD (ed)
289 Aspects of Sobolev-type inequalities, L. SALOFF-COSTE
290 Quantum groups and Lie theory, A. PRESSLEY (ed)
291 Tits buildings and the model theory of groups, K. TENT (ed)
292 A quantum groups primer, S. MAJID
293 Second order partial differential equations in Hilbert spaces, G. DA PRATO & J. ZABCZYK
294 Introduction to operator space theory, G. PISIER
295 Geometry and integrability, L. MASON & Y. NUTKU (eds)
296 Lectures on invariant theory, I. DOLGACHEV
297 The homotopy category of simply connected 4-manifolds, H.-J. BAUES
298 Higher operads, higher categories, T. LEINSTER (ed)
299 Kleinian groups and hyperbolic 3-manifolds, Y. KOMORI, V. MARKOVIC & C. SERIES (eds)
300 Introduction to Möbius differential geometry, U. HERTRICH-JEROMIN
301 Stable modules and the D(2)-problem, F.E.A. JOHNSON
302 Discrete and continuous nonlinear Schrödinger systems, M.J. ABLOWITZ, B. PRINARI & A.D. TRUBATCH
303 Number theory and algebraic geometry, M. REID & A. SKOROBOGATOV (eds)
304 Groups St Andrews 2001 in Oxford I, C.M. CAMPBELL, E.F. ROBERTSON & G.C. SMITH (eds)
305 Groups St Andrews 2001 in Oxford II, C.M. CAMPBELL, E.F. ROBERTSON & G.C. SMITH (eds)
306 Geometric mechanics and symmetry, J. MONTALDI & T. RATIU (eds)
307 Surveys in combinatorics 2003, C.D. WENSLEY (ed.)
308 Topology, geometry and quantum field theory, U.L. TILLMANN (ed)
309 Corings and comodules, T. BRZEZINSKI & R. WISBAUER
310 Topics in dynamics and ergodic theory, S. BEZUGLYI & S. KOLYADA (eds)
311 Groups: topological, combinatorial and arithmetic aspects, T.W. MÜLLER (ed)
312 Foundations of computational mathematics, Minneapolis 2002, F. CUCKER et al (eds)
313 Transcendental aspects of algebraic cycles, S. MÜLLER-STACH & C. PETERS (eds)
314 Spectral generalizations of line graphs, D. CVETKOVIC, P. ROWLINSON & S. SIMIC
315 Structured ring spectra, A. BAKER & B. RICHTER (eds)
316 Linear logic in computer science, T. EHRHARD, P. RUET, J.-Y. GIRARD & P. SCOTT (eds)
317 Advances in elliptic curve cryptography, I.F. BLAKE, G. SEROUSSI & N.P. SMART (eds)
318 Perturbation of the boundary in boundary-value problems of partial differential equations, D. HENRY
319 Double affine Hecke algebras, I. CHEREDNIK
320 L-functions and Galois representations, D. BURNS, K. BUZZARD & J. NEKOVÁŘ (eds)
321 Surveys in modern mathematics, V. PRASOLOV & Y. ILYASHENKO (eds)
322 Recent perspectives in random matrix theory and number theory, F. MEZZADRI & N.C. SNAITH (eds)
323 Poisson geometry, deformation quantisation and group representations, S. GUTT et al (eds)
324 Singularities and computer algebra, C. LOSSEN & G. PFISTER (eds)
325 Lectures on the Ricci flow, P. TOPPING
326 Modular representations of finite groups of Lie type, J.E. HUMPHREYS
327 Surveys in combinatorics 2005, B.S. WEBB (ed)
328 Fundamentals of hyperbolic manifolds, R. CANARY, D. EPSTEIN & A. MARDEN (eds)
329 Spaces of Kleinian groups, Y. MINSKY, M. SAKUMA & C. SERIES (eds)
330 Noncommutative localization in algebra and topology, A. RANICKI (ed)
331 Foundations of computational mathematics, Santander 2005, L.M PARDO, A. PINKUS, E. SÜLI & M.J. TODD (eds)
332 Handbook of tilting theory, L. ANGELERI HÜGEL, D. HAPPEL & H. KRAUSE (eds)
333 Synthetic differential geometry (2nd Edition), A. KOCK
334 The Navier–Stokes equations, N. RILEY & P. DRAZIN
335 Lectures on the combinatorics of free probability, A. NICA & R. SPEICHER
336 Integral closure of ideals, rings, and modules, I. SWANSON & C. HUNEKE
337 Methods in Banach space theory, J.M.F. CASTILLO & W.B. JOHNSON (eds)
338 Surveys in geometry and number theory, N. YOUNG (ed)
339 Groups St Andrews 2005 I, C.M. CAMPBELL, M.R. QUICK, E.F. ROBERTSON & G.C. SMITH (eds)
340 Groups St Andrews 2005 II, C.M. CAMPBELL, M.R. QUICK, E.F. ROBERTSON & G.C. SMITH (eds)
341 Ranks of elliptic curves and random matrix theory, J.B. CONREY, D.W. FARMER, F. MEZZADRI & N.C. SNAITH (eds)
342 Elliptic cohomology, H.R. MILLER & D.C. RAVENEL (eds)
343 Algebraic cycles and motives I, J. NAGEL & C. PETERS (eds)
344 Algebraic cycles and motives II, J. NAGEL & C. PETERS (eds)
345 Algebraic and analytic geometry, A. NEEMAN
346 Surveys in combinatorics 2007, A. HILTON & J. TALBOT (eds)
347 Surveys in contemporary mathematics, N. YOUNG & Y. CHOI (eds)
348 Transcendental dynamics and complex analysis, P.J. RIPPON & G.M. STALLARD (eds)
349 Model theory with applications to algebra and analysis I, Z. CHATZIDAKIS, D. MACPHERSON, A. PILLAY &
A. WILKIE (eds)
350 Model theory with applications to algebra and analysis II, Z. CHATZIDAKIS, D. MACPHERSON, A. PILLAY &
A. WILKIE (eds)
351 Finite von Neumann algebras and masas, A.M. SINCLAIR & R.R. SMITH
352 Number theory and polynomials, J. MCKEE & C. SMYTH (eds)
353 Trends in stochastic analysis, J. BLATH, P. MÖRTERS & M. SCHEUTZOW (eds)
354 Groups and analysis, K. TENT (ed)
355 Non-equilibrium statistical mechanics and turbulence, J. CARDY, G. FALKOVICH & K. GAWEDZKI
356 Elliptic curves and big Galois representations, D. DELBOURGO
357 Algebraic theory of differential equations, M.A.H. MACCALLUM & A.V. MIKHAILOV (eds)
358 Geometric and cohomological methods in group theory, M.R. BRIDSON, P.H. KROPHOLLER & I.J. LEARY (eds)
359 Moduli spaces and vector bundles, L. BRAMBILA-PAZ, S.B. BRADLOW, O. GARCÍA-PRADA & S. RAMANAN (eds)
360 Zariski geometries, B. ZILBER
361 Words: Notes on verbal width in groups, D. SEGAL
362 Differential tensor algebras and their module categories, R. BAUTISTA, L. SALMERÓN & R. ZUAZUA
363 Foundations of computational mathematics, Hong Kong 2008, F. CUCKER, A. PINKUS & M.J. TODD (eds)
364 Partial differential equations and fluid mechanics, J.C. ROBINSON & J.L. RODRIGO (eds)
365 Surveys in combinatorics 2009, S. HUCZYNSKA, J.D. MITCHELL & C.M. RONEY-DOUGAL (eds)
366 Highly oscillatory problems, B. ENGQUIST, A. FOKAS, E. HAIRER & A. ISERLES (eds)
367 Random matrices: High dimensional phenomena, G. BLOWER
368 Geometry of Riemann surfaces, F.P. GARDINER, G. GONZÁLEZ-DIEZ & C. KOUROUNIOTIS (eds)
369 Epidemics and rumours in complex networks, M. DRAIEF & L. MASSOULIÉ
370 Theory of p-adic distributions, S. ALBEVERIO, A.YU. KHRENNIKOV & V.M. SHELKOVICH
371 Conformal fractals, F. PRZYTYCKI & M. URBAŃSKI
372 Moonshine: The first quarter century and beyond, J. LEPOWSKY, J. MCKAY & M.P. TUITE (eds)
373 Smoothness, regularity and complete intersection, J. MAJADAS & A. G. RODICIO
374 Geometric analysis of hyperbolic differential equations: An introduction, S. ALINHAC
375 Triangulated categories, T. HOLM, P. JØRGENSEN & R. ROUQUIER (eds)
376 Permutation patterns, S. LINTON, N. RUŠKUC & V. VATTER (eds)
377 An introduction to Galois cohomology and its applications, G. BERHUY
378 Probability and mathematical genetics, N. H. BINGHAM & C. M. GOLDIE (eds)
379 Finite and algorithmic model theory, J. ESPARZA, C. MICHAUX & C. STEINHORN (eds)
380 Real and complex singularities, M. MANOEL, M.C. ROMERO FUSTER & C.T.C WALL (eds)
381 Symmetries and integrability of difference equations, D. LEVI, P. OLVER, Z. THOMOVA & P. WINTERNITZ (eds)
382 Forcing with random variables and proof complexity, J. KRAJÍČEK
383 Motivic integration and its interactions with model theory and non-Archimedean geometry I, R. CLUCKERS,
J. NICAISE & J. SEBAG (eds)
384 Motivic integration and its interactions with model theory and non-Archimedean geometry II, R. CLUCKERS,
J. NICAISE & J. SEBAG (eds)
385 Entropy of hidden Markov processes and connections to dynamical systems, B. MARCUS, K. PETERSEN &
T. WEISSMAN (eds)
386 Independence-friendly logic, A.L. MANN, G. SANDU & M. SEVENSTER
387 Groups St Andrews 2009 in Bath I, C.M. CAMPBELL et al (eds)
388 Groups St Andrews 2009 in Bath II, C.M. CAMPBELL et al (eds)
389 Random fields on the sphere, D. MARINUCCI & G. PECCATI
390 Localization in periodic potentials, D.E. PELINOVSKY
391 Fusion systems in algebra and topology, M. ASCHBACHER, R. KESSAR & B. OLIVER
392 Surveys in combinatorics 2011, R. CHAPMAN (ed)
393 Non-abelian fundamental groups and Iwasawa theory, J. COATES et al (eds)
394 Variational problems in differential geometry, R. BIELAWSKI, K. HOUSTON & M. SPEIGHT (eds)
395 How groups grow, A. MANN
396 Arithmetic dfferential operators over the p-adic Integers, C.C. RALPH & S.R. SIMANCA
397 Hyperbolic geometry and applications in quantum chaos and cosmology, J. BOLTE & F. STEINER (eds)
398 Mathematical models in contact mechanics, M. SOFONEA & A. MATEI
399 Circuit double cover of graphs, C.-Q. ZHANG
400 Dense sphere packings: a blueprint for formal proofs, T. HALES
401 A double Hall algebra approach to affine quantum Schur-Weyl theory, B. DENG, J. DU & Q. FU
402 Mathematical aspects of fluid mechanics, J. ROBINSON, J.L. RODRIGO & W. SADOWSKI (eds)
403 Foundations of computational mathematics: Budapest 2011, F. CUCKER, T. KRICK, A. SZANTO & A. PINKUS (eds)
404 Operator methods for boundary value problems, S. HASSI, H.S.V. DE SNOO & F.H. SZAFRANIEC (eds)
405 Torsors, étale homotopy and applications to rational points, A.N. SKOROBOGATOV (ed)
406 Appalachian set theory, J. CUMMINGS & E. SCHIMMERLING (eds)
407 The maximal subgroups of the low-dimensional finite classical groups, J.N. BRAY, D.F. HOLT & C.M. RONEY-DOUGAL
408 Complexity science: the Warwick master’s course, R. BALL, R.S. MACKAY & V. KOLOKOLTSOV (eds)
409 Surveys in combinatorics 2013, S. BLACKBURN, S. GERKE & M. WILDON (eds)
410 Representation theory and harmonic analysis of wreath products of finite groups, T. CECCHERINI SILBERSTEIN,
F. SCARABOTTI & F. TOLLI
411 Moduli spaces, L. BRAMBILA-PAZ, O. GARCIA-PRADA, P. NEWSTEAD & R. THOMAS (eds)
412 Automorphisms and equivalence relations in topological dynamics, D.B. ELLIS & R. ELLIS
413 Optimal transportation: theory and applications, Y. OLLIVIER, H. PAJOT & C. VILLANI (eds)
London Mathematical Society Lecture Note Series: 414
Edited by
FRED DIAMOND
King’s College London
PAY MA N L . KASSAEI
McGill University, Montréal
M I N H YO N G K I M
University of Oxford
University Printing House, Cambridge CB2 8BS, United Kingdom
www.cambridge.org
Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9781107691926
c Cambridge University Press 2014
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception
and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements,
no reproduction of any part may take place without the written
permission of Cambridge University Press.
First published 2014
Printed in the United Kingdom by CPI Group Ltd, Croydon CR0 4YY
A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library
Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication data
Automorphic forms and galois representations / edited by Fred Diamond, King’s College
London, Payman L. Kassaei, McGill University, Montréal, Minhyong Kim, University of
Oxford.
volumes <1–2> cm. – (London Mathematical Society lecture note series ; 414, 415)
Papers presented at the London Mathematical Society, and EPSRC (Great Britain
Engineering and Physical Sciences Research Council), Symposium on Galois
Representations and Automorphic Forms, held at the University of Durham from
July 18–28, 2011.
ISBN 978-1-107-69192-6 (v. 1) – ISBN 978-1-107-69363-0 (v. 2)
1. Automorphic forms–Congresses. 2. Automorphic functions–Congresses. 3. Forms
(Mathematics)–Congresses. 4. Galois theory–Congresses. I. Diamond, Fred, editor of
compilation. II. Kassaei, Payman L., 1973– editor of compilation. III. Kim, Minhyong,
editor of compilation. IV. Symposium on Galois Representations and Automorphic
Forms (2011 : Durham, England)
QA353.A9A925 2014
515 .9–dc23
2014001841
ISBN 978-1-107-69192-6 Paperback
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of
URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication,
and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain,
accurate or appropriate.
Contents
v
Contributors
vi
List of contributors vii
Fred Diamond
Payman Kassaei
Minhyong Kim
ix
1
A semi-stable case of the Shafarevich
Conjecture
Victor Abrashkin
Abstract
Suppose K = W (k)[1/ p], where W (k) is the ring of Witt vectors with coef-
ficients in an algebraically closed field k of characteristic p = 2. We discuss
an explicit construction of p-adic semi-stable representations of the absolute
Galois group of K with Hodge–Tate weights from [0, p). This theory is applied
to projective algebraic varieties over Q with good reduction outside 3 and
semi-stable reduction modulo 3.
Introduction
In this expository paper we discuss the following result in the spirit of the Sha-
farevich Conjecture about non-existence of non-trivial abelian schemes over Z.
Theorem 1.1. If Y is a projective algebraic variety over Q with good reduc-
tion outside 3 and semi-stable reduction modulo 3 then h 2 (YC ) = h 1,1 (YC ).
In particular, the above theorem implies that there are no such (non-trivial)
abelian varieties Y (first proved in [13, 27]). Our result also eliminates a great
deal of other varieties, e.g. all K3-surfaces.
The proof of Theorem 1.1 is given in [11] and is based on a:
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
1
2 Victor Abrashkin
The strategy of the proof is very close to the strategy used in the following
“crystalline case” of the Shafarevich Conjecture [23, 7].
Part (a) of this Theorem was obtained in [7] by studying the finite subquo-
tients of the Galois modules Heti (X Q̄ , Q5 ) with 1 i 3. These Galois
modules are unramified outside 5 and their local behaviour at 5 is described by
the Fontaine–Laffaille theory [19] of p-adic torsion crystalline representations
with HT weights from [0, p − 2]. The approach in [7] is essentially similar to
the approach from [23] but Fontaine considers etale cohomology with coeffi-
cients in Q7 . (Of course, these results would be not possible without the great
achievements of Fontaine’s theory of p-adic periods.)
Part (b) was proved by the author in [7]. The proof requires the study of
the Galois module Het4 (X Q̄ , Q5 ), where the tools of the Fontaine–Laffaille
theory are not sufficient. For this reason, we developed in [6] a modifica-
tion of the Fontaine–Laffaille theory for crystalline representations with HT
weights from [0, p − 1]. Note that our modification of Breuil’s theory works
also in the context of crystalline representations and can be applied to reprove
√
part b) √ of Theorem 1.2 (and similar results for varieties over Q(i ), Q( −3)
and Q( 5) from [7]). The appropriate comments will be given in due course
below.
The constructions in [11] are very technical and we just sketch and discuss
their basic steps. Most of them can be illustrated by earlier results related to
the Shafarevich Conjecture, cf. Section 1.
In Sections 2–4 we work with a local field K = Frac W (k), where W (k)
is the ring of Witt vectors with coefficients in an algebracally closed field
k of characteristic p, p > 2. Let K̄ be an algebraic closure of K and
K = Gal ( K̄ /K ). In Section 2 we outline the construction of the func-
tor V ∗ from an appropriate category of filtered modules to the category of
F p [ K ]-modules. This construction is based on the introduction of a mod-
ulo p “truncated” version of Fontaine’s ring of p-adic semi-stable periods.
Semi-stable case 3
sequence of 2-divisible groups from (d) splits over F2 and, therefore, A has
infinitely many F2 -points. The contradiction.
The above method does not work in higher dimensions.
Indeed, suppose A is an abelian scheme over Z and G = Ker(2id A ) is a
group scheme of points of order 2 on A. Then |G| = 22g , dim(G ⊗ F2 ) = g
and Tate’s formula gives v2 (D(A(G))1/2g ) = g. Note that A(G) ⊗ Q is the
product of algebraic number fields (because G ⊗ Q is etale) and these fields
are unramified outside 2 (because G ⊗ Zl is etale if l = 2). Therefore, the
normalized discriminant of A(G) equals 2g and tends to infinity if g → ∞.
On the other hand, if Q(G) is the field-of-definition of Q̄-points of G,
then Gal(Q(G)/Q) ⊂ SL(2g, F2 ) is not generally soluble if g 2, and
the only global idea we can use in this situation is related to lower bounds
of minimal discriminants of algebraic number fields. The best known bounds
are the Odlyzko estimates and they are given by the tables of real numbers
{d N | N ∈ N} such that if [K : Q] = N then |D(K /Q)|1/N ≥ d N . For large
N , d N ≈ d∞ ≈ 22.3; under GRH there are better estimates {d N∗ | N ∈ N} in
∗ ≈ 44.76, [30, 18, 25].
this case d∞
Unfortunately, an analogue of Odlyzko estimates under additional assump-
tion that K /Q is ramified only over 2, does not exist. Nonetheless, A(G)
is considerably smaller than its integral closure and Tate’s formula can be
replaced by a much better upper estimate for the 2-adic valuation of the nor-
malized discriminant of Q(G). The evidence for its existence is illustrated in
the next section.
This implies that G is the product of constant etale and multiplicative f.f.g.s.
over Z, the corresponding p-divisible group of A will be just the product
of several copies of trivial etale (Q p /Z p )Z and multiplicative {μ2n ,Z }n1
p-divisible groups over Z and, therefore, such abelian variety does not
exist.
The above case of the Shafarevich Conjecture was not published but gave a
right direction towards the proof of the general case.
the bigger list of algebraic number fields where the Shafarevich conjecture
about the non-existence of abelian varieties with everywhere good reduction
holds. Our main idea [4] of removing the restriction to unipotent objects in
Fontaine’s classification of 2-group schemes in [20] gave later a right approach
to the constructions of modifications of the Fontaine–Laffaille [6] and Breuil
[11] functors. These modifications allow us to obtain the ramification estimates
for all modulo p subquotients of representations with HT weights from [0, p).
They also provide us with the nullity of some groups of extensions in the cat-
egory of Galois modules appearing as such subquotients. As a matter of fact,
these two key ingredients resulted finally in proving Theorem 1.1 and part (b)
of Theorem 1.2.
2. The functor CV ∗
Let W1 = k[[u]], where u is an indeterminate. Denote by σ the automorphism
of k induced by the p-th power map on k and agree to use the same symbol
for the continuous extension of σ to W1 such that σ (u) = u p . Denote by N :
W1 −→ W1 the unique continuous k-differentiation such that N (u) = −u.
The above categories are analogs of the categories of filtered modules from
[14], Subsection 2.1.2, but we work with the category of W1 -modules. (Breuil
uses modules over the appropriate divided power envelope of W (k)[[u]]).)
Note that in the context of W1 -modules the monodromy operator N can’t be
defined as a map with values in L. In [11], Subsection 1.1, we proved that N
can be defined as a map from L to L/u 2 p L and it appears as a unique lift of
its reduction N1 = N mod u p L. (We used the existence of such a lift when
proving in [11] that the category L∗ is pre-abelian; we also need this property
when defining the functor V ∗ in Subsection 2.3 below.) In this chapter we use
the notation N for this (mod u p )-map N1 ;
is short exact.
Note that ϕ(F(L)) is a σ (W1 )-module and L = ϕ(F(L)) ⊗σ (W1 ) W1 .
If l ∈ L and for 0 i < p, the elements l (i) ∈ F(L) are such that
(i) (0) −1 -linear
l = 0i< p ϕ(l ) ⊗ u , set V (l) = l . Then V mod u is a σ
i
∗
2.2. The object R0st ∈ L
Let R = lim( Ō/ p)n be Fontaine’s ring; it has a natural structure of k-algebra
← −
n
via the map k −→ R given by α → lim([σ −n α]mod p), where [γ ] ∈ W (k) ⊂
← −
n
Ō denotes the Teichmüller representative of γ ∈ k. Let m R be the maximal
ideal of R.
(n)
Choose x0 = (x0 mod p)n0 ∈ R and ε = (ε(n) mod p)n0 such that for
(n+1) p
all n 0, x0 = x0(n) and ε(n+1) p = ε(n) with x0(0) = − p, ε(0) = 1 but
(1)
ε = 1. Denote by v R the valuation on R such that v R (x0 ) = 1.
Let Y be an indeterminate.
Consider the divided power envelope RY of R[Y ] with respect to the
ideal (Y ). If for j 0, γ j (Y ) is the j-th divided power of Y then RY =
⊕ j0 Rγ j (Y ). Denote by Rst the completion j0 Rγ j (Y ) of RY and set,
Fil p Rst = j p Rγ j (Y ). Define the σ -linear morphism of the R-algebra
p
Rst by the correspondence Y → x0 Y ; it will be denoted below by the same
symbol σ .
Introduce a W1 -module structure on Rst by the k-algebra morphism
W1 −→ Rst such that u → ι(u) := x0 exp(−Y ) = x0 j0 (−1) j γ j (Y ).
p−1−i
Set F(Rst ) = 0i< p x0 Rγi (Y ) + Fil p Rst .
Define the continuous σ -linear morphism of R-modules ϕ : F(Rst ) −→
p−1−i p
Rst by setting for 0 i < p, ϕ(x0 γi (Y )) = γi (Y )(1 − (i/2)x0 Y ), and
for i p, ϕ(γi (Y )) = 0.
Let N be a unique R-differentiation of Rst such that N (Y ) = 1.
∗
Note that (Rst , F(Rst ), ϕ, N ) is not an object of L , e.g. ϕ is not a
σ -linear morphism of W1 -modules. Nevertheless, all appropriate compati-
bilities between above introduced additional structures on Rst hold modulo
2p
x0 Rst , cf. Proposition 2.1 in [11], and we can introduce
10 Victor Abrashkin
∗
R0st = (Rst
0
, F(Rst
0
), ϕ, N ) ∈
L ,
p
0 = R mod x m and F(R 0 ) = F(R )mod x m with the p
where Rst st 0 R st st 0 R
appropriate induced maps ϕ and N .
In our theory R0st plays a role of the ring Âst from the theory of p-adic semi-
stable representations [14], Subsection 3.1.1. In particular, Rst 0 can be provided
with continuous Galois action as follows. For any τ ∈ K , let k(τ ) ∈ Z be such
+ X ) = X − X 2 /2 + · · · − X p−1 /( p − 1)
that τ (x0 ) = εk(τ ) x0 and let log(1
be the truncated logarithm. Define a map τ : Rst −→ Rst by extending the
natural action of τ on R and setting for all j 0,
τ (γ j (Y )) :=
γ j −i (Y )γi (logε).
0imin{ j, p−1}
Then the correspondences γ j (Y ) → τ (γ j (Y )) induce a K -action on the
W1 -algebra Rst0 which extends the natural -action on R and respects the
K
∗
structure of R0st as an object of the category
L , cf. Proposition 2.2 in [11].
⎧ ⎫
⎨ ⎬
V ∗ (L) = N ∗i ( f 0 )γi (Y ) mod J | f 0 ∈ V0∗ (L) . (1.2)
⎩ ⎭
0i< p
this requires just the (mod u p )-version of N , cf. discussion in Subsection 2.1.
For future applications also notice the following two special cases of above
general description (1.2).
√
(a) Let K ,1 = Gal( K̄ /K ( p p) ⊂ K . Then this group acts trivially on
Y mod J and x0 mod x0 m R . Therefore, for any L ∈ L∗ , the map pr0 :
p
The simple objects in CM K are of the form either (H, 0, 0), where H is a
simple Z p [ K ]-module, or (F p , F p , id), where F p is provided with the trivial
K -action. The functor CV ∗ establishes a bijection of the families of simple
objects in L∗ and CM K , cf. Proposition 2.8 of [11].
In particular, let L0 = (W1 , u p−1 W1 , ϕ) ∈ L∗cr be such that ϕ(u p−1 ) = 1,
and L p−1 = (W1 , W1 , ϕ) ∈ L∗cr be such that ϕ(1) = 1. Then CV ∗ (L0 ) =
F0 := (F p , F p , id) and CV ∗ (L p−1 ) = F p−1 := (F p , 0, 0).
The functor CV ∗ is fully faithful, cf. Proposition 2.13 in [11].
By devissage the proof of this result is reduced to the fact that for any two
simple objects L , L ∈ L∗ , CV ∗ induces an injective map from ExtL∗ (L , L )
to ExtCM K (CV ∗ (L ), CV ∗ (L )). The first group was explicitly described in
Subsection 1.5 of [11] and the corresponding objects of CM K were studied
in Subsections 2.5-2.8 of [11] by the use of (1.2).
3. Ramification estimates
3.1. Ramification estimates
For any rational number v 0, denote by (v)K the higher ramification sub-
group of K in upper numbering, [28]. In this section we prove the following
theorem.
Semi-stable case 13
(v)
Theorem 1.3. (a) If L ∈ L∗ and v > 2 − 1
p then K acts trivially on V ∗ (L).
(b) If L ∈ L∗cr and v > 1 then (v) ∗
K acts trivially on V (L).
(c) The above ramification estimates are sharp.
The proof of part (a) was only outlined in Subsection 2.9 of [11]. In Sub-
sections 3.3–3.5 we shall give a proof based on our characteristic p approach
from [8, 9, 10]. One can also apply the methods from [24].
(v) (v )
Remark. (a) If ϕ F/E (v1 ) = v then I E = I F 1 (with respect to the natu-
(v) (v)
ral identification I E = I F ); (b) E = E ∩ I E is just the usual higher
ramification subgroup of E with upper number v.
The ramification theory is perfectly compatible with the field-of-norms
functor of Fontaine–Wintenberger, [32]. Suppose E/E is an infinite strictly
APF-extension in E sep . Then one can define the Herbrand function ϕ = ϕ E/E
as the limit of Herbrand functions of all finite extensions of E in E. In this
situation the field-of-norms functor X gives a complete discrete valuation field
E = X (E) of characteristic p, its separable closure Esep = X (E sep ) and the
embedding X : I E −→ IE .
With the above notation, the compatibility of the field-of-norms functor X
with the ramification filtration means that for any v 0,
(
ϕ (v)) (v)
X (I E ) = X (I E ) ∩ IE .
We apply this general theory in the following situation.
√
Fix an algebraic closure K̄ of K and set for n 0, K n = K ( pn p) ⊂ K̄ .
= n K n is a strictly APF-extension and by [32],
Then K
– K = X (K ) = k((x0 )) ⊂ Frac R;
– X ( K̄ ) = Ksep is a separable closure of K in Frac R;
– X transforms the action of K on K̄ to the natural action of K on Frac R
and K X ( K ) ⊂ IK (remind that the residue field k of K is assumed
to be algebraically closed).
Note that for the derivative of the Herbrand function ϕ K/K it holds
1, if 0 < x < p/( p − 1)
ϕ K/K (x) =
1/ p, if p( p − 1) < x < p 2 /( p − 1).
Therefore,
(2−1/ p) ( p−1) (1) (1)
X ( K ) = X ( K ) ∩ IK , X ( K ) = X ( K ) ∩ IK . (1.3)
√ (2−1/ p)
Let H = V ∗ (L). Because K ,1 = Gal( K̄ /K ( p p)) ⊃ K , we can
assume that H = V0∗ (L).
Lemma 1.4. There is a natural identification of F p [ K,1 ]-modules
p−1 p
H = {r̄ ∈ R s mod x0 m R | σ (r̄ )C ≡ x0 r̄ mod x0 m R }.
Proof of Lemma. Indeed, if h ∈ H , then h(l) ¯ = r̄ ∗ mod x m R , where r̄ ∗ ∈ R s
p
0
is such that
σ (r̄ ∗ )σ (C)
≡ r̄ ∗ mod x0 m R .
p
p( p−1)
x0
p
γ ∈ k[[x0 ]], κ(γ )q ≡ γ mod x0 m R . The isomorphism κ can be extended
to an isomorphism of separable closures of these fields in R. Therefore, we
(v) (v)
have the bijection κ ∗ : IK −→ IK such that for any v 0, κ ∗ (IK ) = IK .
In particular, if
p−1 p
h ∈ H = {r̄ ∈ R s mod x0 m R | σ (r̄ )κ(C) ≡ x0 r̄ mod x0 m R }
(v)
then for any v > v ∗ and τ ∈ IK , τ (h ) = h .
On the other hand, from Lemma 1.5 (c) it follows that
p−1 p
H = {r̄ ∈ R s mod x0 m R | σ (r̄ )σ q (κ(C)) ≡ x0 r̄ mod x0 m R }.
Therefore, the map r̄ → σ q (r̄ ) establishes a Galois equivariant bijection of
(v ∗ ) (ϕ (v ∗ )) (v)
H and H . Because, IK = IK K /K , this implies that for any τ ∈ IK
with v > ϕK /K (v ∗ ), τ | H = id. But ϕK /K (v ∗ ) < v ∗ . The contradiction.
3.4.
Prove that the ramification estimate from Theorem 1.3(a) is sharp.
∗
Introduce L = (L , F(L), ϕ, N ) ∈ L such that:
– L = p>i0 W1 li ;
– F(L) = p>i 0 W1 f i , where for p > i 1, f i = u i (l p−1 + · · · + li )
and f 0 = u p−1i 2 (i − 1)li + l1 + l0 ;
– for all i, ϕ( f i ) = li ;
– N (l p−1 ) = 0, if p − 1 > i 1 then N (li ) = li+1 mod u p L, and N (l0 ) =
−l2 mod u p L.
...
p p p−2 p−1
r p−1 + · · · + r1 ≡ x0 r1 mod x0 mR
p p p p p−1 p
r p−1 ( p − 2)x0 + · · · + r2 x0 + r1 + r0 ≡ x0 r0 mod x0 m R
Semi-stable case 17
(v)
Let v ∗ 0 be the minimal such that for all v > v ∗ , IK acts trivially on H .
We must prove that v ∗ = p − 1.
Suppose v ∗ < p − 1.
Choose r ∗ ∈ (v ∗ , p − 1) such that v p (r ∗ ) = 0. As earlier, we can assume
that r ∗ = m/(q −1), where m ∈ N, q is a power of p and r ∗ (1−1/q) > p −2.
Apply Lemma 1.5 and consider the appropriate fields isomorphism κ :
iq q
K −→ K . If κ(x0 ) = x0 then for i 2, x0 ≡ x0i mod x0 m R , x0 ≡
p
q+r ∗ (q−1) p q+r ∗ (q−1) p−1
x0 + x0 mod x0 m R and x0 ∈ x0 m R .
This implies that for p − 1 i 1, ri ≡ σ q (ri ) mod x0 m R and ri ≡
p
q+r ∗ (q−1) p
≡ r p−1 x0 mod x0 m R .
r ∗ (q−1)
Note that the assumption r ∗ (1 − 1/q) > 1 implies that x0 ∈ x0 m R
and for all 1 i s,
(σ q ri ) p
p
ri p
pb
≡ q pb
mod x0 m R .
x0 i x0 i
3.6.
(1)
The example in Subsection 2.4 shows that for all γ = 0, IK acts non-trivially
on h 0 ∈ V [γ ] = V ∗ (L[γ ]). Therefore, the estimate from (b) is sharp.
4.2.2.
If M = (M, F(M)) ∈ Lt then it is called multiplicative if M = F(M) and
etale if F(M) = u p−1 M. As usually, any M ∈ Lt has a unique maximal etale
subobject ιet : Met −→ M and a unique maximal multiplicative quotient
object ιm : M −→ Mm . We call M ∈ Lt unipotent if Mm = 0.
By compairing V t and the functor V ∗ from Subsection 2.3 we deduce that
V t is fully faithful on the subcategory Lt,u of unipotent objects of Lt . Quite
oppositely, if M ∈ Lt , pM = 0 and
0 −→ Mu −→ M −→ Mm −→ 0
nomenon by studying the abstract module V0 (L) = HomL ∗ (L, Acr,1 ). Even
0
more, we can treat Lcr as a full subcategory of L and then for L ∈ L∗cr ,
∗ t
0 −→ L0 −→ L[γ ] → L p−1 → 0
0 −→ H p−1 −→ H −→ H0 −→ 0
Lemma 1.6. For any α ∈ R, there is a unique r ∗ (α) ∈ R mod x 0 such that
p
−p
Proof. It follows from the congruence A p − A = αx0 mod R, where A =
−p
r ∗ (α)x0 ∈ Frac R.
h : (l0 , l1 ) → (− f 0 T1 + f 0 , r−1 T1 + r0 ),
(H0 ) = HomL
∗ (L[γ ], Acr,1 ).
0
(1.5)
0
4.2.3.
For M ∈ L f t , let M ∈ L f t be such that pM = M and let
V f t (C p ) V f t (K p )
V f t ( p Mu ) −→ V f t ( p M ) −→ V f t (M ) −→
V f t (Mp ) −→ V f t (Mm
p ).
Then:
– ◦ V f t (K p ) ◦ V f t (C p ) ◦ = 0;
– K -module V f t (M) := Ker( ◦ V f t (K p ))/Im (V f t (C p ) ◦ ) does not
depend on a choice of M ;
– V f t (Mu ) = V f t (Mu ), V f t (Mm ) = V f t (Mm );
– there is a canonical epimorphism V f t (i et ) :
V f t (M) −→ V f t (Met ).
f t : L f t −→ CM is
Definition. The modification of Breuil’s functor CV K
induced by the correspondence M → (V f t (M),
V f t (Met ),
V f t (i et )).
Proof. This follows from the appropriate statements in L∗cr and L∗ . As a matter
of fact, the cases j1 = 0 or j2 = p − 1 are just the existence of a maximal etale
subobject and a maximal multiplicative quotient. In the case (a), the appro-
priate statements in L∗cr are just easy exercises or one can use very general
approach from Subsection 1.5 of [11].
Remark. An analogue of property (a) for CM st 1,K is false because there are
appropriate non-trivial extensions in the category L∗ . Nevertheless, there is a
chance to have such analogue in the smaller category CM 0,st1,K of the objects
ft
CV (L) such that L ∈ L [1] := {L ∈ L | pL = 0}. A partial evidence for
ft ft
p,cr
5.1. The category M Q
The objects of the category M Q
p,cr cr ) such that
are the pairs HQ = (H, H
● H ∈ M Q is unramified outside of p;
● cr = (Hcr , H 0 , j ) ∈ CM cr – the full subcategory in CM K of the
H K
objects of the form C
ft ft
V (L), where L ∈ Lcr ;
● H | K = Hcr ;
●
p,cr
morphisms in M Q are compatible morphisms of Galois modules.
p,cr
Clearly, M Q is a special pre-abelian category.
p,cr p,cr
Let M Q [1] be the subcategory in M Q consisting of all HQ =
(H, Hcr ) such that p H = 0. Denote by Qcr ( p) the field-of-definition of
all H ∈ M Q such that HQ = (H, H cr ) ∈ M p,cr [1]. In other words,
Q
τ ∈ Gal(Q̄/Qcr ( p)) iff τ acts trivially on the first components H of all
p,cr
HQ ∈ M Q [1].
(n)
cr
Let HQ = {(H (n) , H
p,cr
)}n0 be a p-divisible group in M Q. Then H =
{H (n) }n0 is a p-divisible group in M Q .
p,st
5.2. The category M Q
The objects of the category M Q
p,st st ) such that
are the pairs HQ = (H, H
● H ∈ M Q is unramified outside of p;
● st = (Hst , H 0 , j ) ∈ CM 0,st – the full subcategory in CM K consisting
H K
of C
ft
V (L) such that L ∈ L f t ;
26 Victor Abrashkin
● H | K = Hst ;
●
p,st
morphisms in M Q are compatible morphisms of Galois modules.
p,st
Clearly, M Q is a special pre-abelian category.
p,st p,st
Let M Q [1] be the subcategory in M Q consisting of all HQ =
st ) such that p H = 0. Denote by Qst ( p) the field-of-definition of all
(H, H
H ∈ M Q such that HQ = (H, H st ) ∈ M p,st [1].
Q
(n)
cr
Let HQ = {(H (n) , H
p,cr
)}n0 be a p-divisible group in M . Similarly
Q
to Proposition 1.10 we obtain the following property.
Proposition 1.11. If Qst ( p) is totally ramified at p then there are p-divisible
groups H = H0 ⊃ H1 ⊃ H2 in M Q such that H0 /H1 is the product of sev-
eral copies of Q p /Z p , H2 is the product of several copies of (Q p /Z p )( p − 1)
and all simple subquotients in H1 /H2 come from objects F j = (F p ( j ), 0, 0)
with 1 j p − 2.
invariant lattice in V then the 5-divisible group {T /5n }n0 appears as the
first component of the appropriate 5-divisible group in M 5,cr
Q . Therefore,
part (b) of Theorem 1.2 is implied by the following Proposition. (This
Proposition was stated without proof at the end of [7].)
Remark. (a) For part (a) of Theorem 1.2 take V = H 3 (X Q̄ , Q5 ). Then the
corresponding ramification estimates are better, cf. Subsection 4.3. As a result,
one can use unconditional Odlyzkoestimates to find that all modulo 5 subquo-
tients of V are defined over Q(ζ5 , 5 ζ5 + ζ5−1 ), cf. [7], Subsection 7.5.1, where
this field was denoted by Q(5, 3).
(b) Unconditional Odlyzko estimates are still sufficient to prove that
h (X C ) √
2 = h 1,1 (X√
C ), when X √
has everywhere good reduction and is defined
over Q( −3), Q( −1) or Q( 5), cf. Section 7 of [7].
Proof. For a complete proof cf. [11], Lemma 5.2. Note that the upper esti-
mate for the normalized discriminant of Qst (3)/Q
√ is 33−1/3 < d238 , therefore
[Qst (3) : Q] < 238. Because K 1 = Q( 3, exp(2πi/9)) is contained in
3
Qst (3), the group Gal(Qst (3)/Q) is soluble. Then the proof that Qst (3) =
K 1 requires calculations with fundamental units inside K 1 . Namely, we
need that:
Both properties were verified via the computing package SAGE, cf.
www.sagemath.org and Appendix B of [11].
Note that under the condition that Qst ( p) is totally ramified at p we can
p,st
identify M Q with full subcategories in M Q and in CM 0,stK .
Apply Proposition 1.11. Theorem 1.1 will be proved if we show that the
3-divisible group H1 /H2 is the product of 3-divisible groups (Q3 /Z3 )(1).
This would follow from ExtM3,st [1] (F1 , F1 ) = 0. The most natural way
Q
is to verify this in the category CM 0,st 1,K or, equivalently, in the category
L f t [1] = {L ∈ L f t | pL = 0}. Here we come again to the principal differ-
ence between the theories of torsion crystalline and torsion semi-stable Galois
modules. In the semi-stable case we can efficiently work only with the Galois
modules obtained from the objects of Lt [1] = {L ∈ Lt | pL = 0} (which can
be identified with L∗ ), and this category is strictly bigger than L f t [1]. (In the
ft
crystalline case Ltcr = Lcr , cf. Subsection 4.2.1.)
If L1 ∈ Lt is such that V t (L1 ) = F1 , then ExtLt [1] (L1 , L1 ) = 0 and the
question about ExtL f t [1] (L1 , L1 ) = 0 is still open. We did not resolve this issue
in [11] but treated it in the following simpler situation. Remind that all points of
the Galois modules coming from M 3,st Q are defined over the relatively small
field K Qst (3). This allows us to replace the category Lt [1] by a smaller one
LtQ [1], where ExtLt [1] (L1 , L1 ) = Z/3Z is generated by one object L11 (we
Q
use in [11], Subsection 5.4, slightly different notation). Then we prove that any
object of LtQ [1], which has only subquotients of the form L1 , is isomorphic to
the product of several copies of L1 and L11 .
Now come back to our 3-divisible group H1 /H2 viewed as a 3-divisible
group in the category CM 0,st K . If any subquotient of this group contains
H11 = CV ∗ (L11 ) then we apply the devissage from Appendix A to deduce
the existence of a 3-divisible group H = {H (n) }n0 in CM 0,st K such
that H (1) = H11 . The height of this 3-divisible group is 2 and it deter-
mines a 2-dimensional semi-stable Q3 [ K ]-module. But the existence of
such 2-dimensional representation contradicts Theorem 6.1.1.2 from [14].
Semi-stable case 29
0 −→ C 1 −→ C −→ C2 −→ 0
(1) (1)
such that C1 = D1 and C2 = D2 .
(b) Suppose ExtC (1) (C (1) , C (1) ) = 0 then any p-divisible group D in C such
that D (1) C (1) is isomorphic to C.
References
[1] V. A. A BRASHKIN, Good reduction of two-dimensional Abelian varieties (Rus-
sian) Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat., 40 (1976), no. 2, 262–272
[2] V. A. A BRASHKIN, p-divisible groups over Z (Russian) Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR
Ser. Mat., 41 (1977), no. 5, 987–1007
[3] V. A. A BRASHKIN, Group schemes of period p over the ring of Witt vectors
(Russian) Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR, 283 (1985), no. 6, 1289–1294
[4] V. A. A BRASHKIN, Honda systems of group schemes of period p (Russian) Izv.
Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat., 51 (1987), no. 3, 451–484, 688; translation in Math.
USSR-Izv. 30 (1988), no. 3, 419–453
[5] V. A. A BRASHKIN, Galois modules of group schemes of period p over the ring of
Witt vectors (Russian) Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat., 51 (1987), no. 4, 691–736;
translation in Math. USSR-Izv. 31 (1988), no. 1, 1–46
[6] V. A. A BRASHKIN, Modification of the Fontaine-Laffaille functor (Russian), Izv.
Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser Mat, 53 (1989), 451–497; translation in Math. USSR-Izv.,
34 (1990), 57–97
[7] V. A. A BRASHKIN, Modular representations of the Galois group of a local field
and a generalization of a conjecture of Shafarevich (Russian) Izv. Akad. Nauk
SSSR Ser. Mat. 53 (1989), no. 6, 1135–1182; translation in Math. USSR-Izv. 35
(1990), no. 3, 469–518
[8] V. A. A BRASHKIN, A ramification filtration of the Galois group of a local field.
III. (Russian) Izv. Ross. Akad. Nauk Ser. Mat. 62 (1998), no. 5, 3–48; translation
in Izv. Math. 62 (1998), no. 5, 857–900
[9] V. A BRASHKIN, Galois modules arising from Faltings’s strict modules. Compos.
Math. 142 (2006), no. 4, 867–888
[10] V. A BRASHKIN, Characteristic p analogue of modules with finite crystalline
height, Pure Appl. Math. Q., 5 (2009), 469–494
[11] V. A BRASHKIN, Projective varieties with bad reduction at 3 only, Doc. Math. 18
(2013), 547–619.
[12] Algebraic number theory. Proceedings of an instructional conference organized
by the LMS. Edited by J. W. S. Cassels and A. Fröhlich Academic Press, London;
Thompson Book Co., Inc., Washington, D.C. 1967
[13] A. B RUMER , K. K RAMER Non-existence of certain semistable abelian varieties,
Manuscripta Math., 106 (2001), 291–304
[14] C H . B REUIL, Construction de représentations p-adiques semi-stable, Ann. Sci.
École Norm. Sup., 4 Ser., 31 (1998), 281–327
[15] C H . B REUIL, Représentations semi-stables et modules fortement divisibles,
Invent. Math., 136 (1999), 89–122
Semi-stable case 31
[16] C H . B REUIL, Integral p-adic Hodge theory, Adv. Stud. Pure Math. 36 (2002),
51–80
[17] P. D ELIGNE, Les corps locaux de caractristique p, limites de corps locaux de
caractristique 0. (French) Representations of reductive groups over a local field,
119–157, Travaux en Cours, Hermann, Paris, 1984
[18] D IA Y D IAZ, Tables minorant la racine n-ième du discriminant d’un corps de
degré n Publications Mathematiques d’Orsay, 80.06, Université de Paris-Sud,
Départment de Mathématique, Bat. 425, 91405, Orsay, France
[19] J.-M. F ONTAINE , G. L AFFAILLE, Construction de représentations p-adiques,
Ann. Sci. École Norm. Sup., 4 Ser. 15 (1982), 547–608
[20] J.-M. F ONTAINE, Groupes finis commutatifs sur les vecteurs de Witt, C. R. Acad.
Sci. Paris Sér. A-B 280 (1975), A1423A1425
[21] J.-M. F ONTAINE, Il n’y a pas de variété abélienne sur Z, Invent. Math., 81 (1985),
515–538
[22] J.-M. F ONTAINE , W. M ESSING, p-adic periods and p-adic étale cohomol-
ogy. In: Current Trends in Arithmetical Algebraic Geometry, K. Ribet, Editor,
Contemporary Math. 67, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence (1987), 179–207
[23] J.-M. F ONTAINE, Schémas propres et lisses sur Z. Proceedings of the Indo-
French Conference on Geometry (Bombay, 1989), 43–56, Hindustan Book
Agency, Delhi, 1993
[24] S H . H ATTORI, On a ramification bound of torsion semi-stable representations
over a local field, J. Number theory, 129 (2009), 2474–2503
[25] J. M ARTINET, Petits discriminants des corps de nombres, London Math. Soc -
Lect. note ser., 56 (1982), 151–193
[26] W. M ESSING The crystals associated to Barsotti-Tate groups: with applications
to abelian schemes, Lecture notes in Mathematics. 264, Springer-Verlag, 1972
[27] R.S CHOOF, Abelian varieties over Q with bad reduction in one prime only.
Comp. Math., 141 (2005), 847–868.
[28] J.-P.S ERRE , Local Fields Berlin, New York: Springer-Verlag, 1980
[29] I. R. S HAFAREVICH, Algebraic number fields. Proc. Internat. Congr. Math.
(Stockholm, 1962), Inst. Mittag-Leffler, Djursholm, (1963), 163–176
[30] G. P OITOU, Minorations de discriminants (d’apr A. M. Odlyzko). Séminaire
Bourbaki, Vol. 1975/76 28me anne, Exp. No. 479, pp. 136–153. Lecture Notes
in Math., 567, Springer, Berlin, 1977 Berlin, New York: Springer-Verlag, 1980
[31] J. TATE, p-divisible groups, Proc. Conf. Local Fields (Dreibergen, 1966),
Springer-Verlag, Berlin and New-York, 1967, pp. 158–183
[32] J.-P. W INTENBERGER, Le corps des normes de certaines extensions infinies des
corps locaux; application Ann. Sci. Ec. Norm. Super., IV. Ser, 16 (1983), 59–89
[33] J.-P. W INTENBERGER , Extensions de Lie et groupes d’automorphismes des
corps locaux de caractristique p. (French) C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris Sér. A-B 288
(1979), no. 9, A477–A479
2
Irreducible modular representations of the Borel
subgroup of GL2 (Q p )
Laurent Berger and Mathieu Vienney
Abstract
Let E be a finite extension of F p . Using Fontaine’s theory of (ϕ, )-modules,
Colmez has shown how to attach to any irreducible E-linear representation
of Gal(Q p /Q p ) an infinite dimensional smooth irreducible E-linear repre-
sentation of B2 (Q p ) that has a central character. We prove that every such
representation of B2 (Q p ) arises in this way.
Our proof extends to algebraically closed fields E of characteristic p. In
this case, infinite dimensional smooth irreducible E-linear representations of
B2 (Q p ) having a central character arise in a similar way from irreducible E-
linear representations of the Weil group of Q p .
Contents
Introduction page 33
Notation 34
1 (ϕ, )-modules and (ψ, )-modules 34
2 Construction of Galois representations 36
3 Topological representations of profinite groups 41
4 Colmez’s functor 44
5 Representations of B2 (Q p ) 46
References 50
1991 Mathematics Subject Classification. 11F; 11S; 20C; 20G; 22E; 46A.
Key words and phrases. Modular representation; Borel subgroup; Galois representation;
(ϕ, )-module; (ψ, )-module; p-adic Langlands correspondence; linear topology;
non-commutative polynomial.
This research is partially supported by the ANR grant ThéHopaD (Théorie de Hodge p-adique
et Développements) ANR-11-BS01-005.
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
32
Modular representations of the Borel 33
Introduction
This chapter is inspired by the p-adic local Langlands correpondence for
GL2 (Q p ), which is a bijection between some 2-dimensional representations of
Gal(Q p /Q p ) and some representations of GL2 (Q p ). Colmez observed that this
bijection, whose existence had been conjectured by Breuil, can be constructed
using Fontaine’s theory of (ϕ, )-modules, in order to obtain representations of
B2 (Q p ), the upper triangular Borel subgroup of GL2 (Q p ), from 2-dimensional
representations of Gal(Q p /Q p ). In this chapter, we determine completely
which class of representations of B2 (Q p ) can be constructed by applying
Colmez’s method to irreducible mod p representations of Gal(Q p /Q p ) of any
dimension.
Let E be a finite extension of F p . If V is a finite dimensional E-linear
representation of Gal(Q p /Q p ) and if χ is a smooth character of Q× p , then
Colmez’s functor “limψ D (·)” allows us to construct a smooth representation
← −
χ (V ) = (lim D (V ))∗ of the group B2 (Q p ), having χ as central char-
←− ψ
acter. Our first result is the following (see theorem 4.2 and remark 4.3 of
[Vie12b]).
This bijection, which is compatible with the usual theory of (ϕ, )-modules,
does not seem to extend to reducible objects if E is not an algebraic extension
of F p .
In order to prove Theorems A and A , we need to “invert” Colmez’s con-
struction V → (limψ D (V ))∗ . This was done in some cases by Colmez (see
←−
§IV of [Col10b] as well as §4 of Emerton’s [Eme08]) and in much greater
generality by Schneider and Vignéras (see [SV11]). Our method is similar.
The finiteness result that we need in order to conclude is provided by Emerton
(see [Eme08]).
Note that if E is a field of characteristic different from p, then determining
the smooth irreducible representations of B2 (Q p ) is a much easier problem
(see for instance §8 of [BH06] for the case E = C). Likewise, it is a sim-
ple exercise to determine the finite dimensional smooth irreducible E-linear
representations of B2 (Q p ).
Notation
The letter E stands for a field of characteristic p. Throughout this chapter,
E is given the discrete topology. We let B = B2 (Q p ) and write GQ p for
Gal(Q p /Q p ). We define a map n : GQ p → Z as follows: if g ∈ GQ p , then
n(g)
the image of g in Gal(F p /F p ) is Frob p where Frob p = [x → x p ]. The Weil
group of Q p is WQ p = {g ∈ GQ p such that n(g) ∈ Z} and IQ p denotes the
inertia subgroup of GQ p .
In order to retain the spirit of the lectures given at the LMS Durham Sympo-
sium, we explain the idea of the proofs of some of the technical results that are
taken from other papers, in order for this chapter to be more easily readable by
newcomers to the subject.
Example 2.2. If δ : Q× ×
p → E is a continuous character, then we define
E((X ))(δ) as the (ϕ, )-module of dimension 1 having eδ as a basis, where
ϕ(eδ ) = δ( p)eδ and [a]eδ = δ(a)eδ . Every (ϕ, )-module of dimension 1 is
then isomorphic to E((X ))(δ) for a well-defined character δ : Q× ×
p → E .
p−1
If α(X ) ∈ E((X )), then we can write α(X ) = j=0 (1 + X ) α j (X ) in
j p
Proof. This is proved in §II.4 and §II.5 of [Col10a] if E is a finite field, and
more generally in §4.3 of [Vie12a]. Note that if D is of dimension 1, then the
existence of M and the fact that either M = E[[X ]] · eδ or M = X −1 E[[X ]] · eδ
36 Laurent Berger and Mathieu Vienney
are both simple exercises. In general, Colmez constructs both a smallest and a
largest such sub-(ψ, )-module, denoted by D and D respectively. He then
proves (see corollary II.5.21 of [Col10a] and theorem 4.3.50 of [Vie12a]) that
if D is irreducible of dimension 2, then D = D .
Definition 2.5. We denote by M(D) the surjective (ψ, )-module attached to
an irreducible (ϕ, )-module D (if D is of dimension 1, then we take M(D) =
E[[X ]] · eδ ), so that our M(D) is Colmez’s D .
Theorem 2.6. If M is a surjective (ψ, )-module that is non-degenerate and
free over E[[X ]], then there exists a compatible (ϕ, )-module structure on
D = E((X )) ⊗ E [[X ]] M.
Proof. Let D = E((X )) ⊗ E[[X ]] M and let D be D but with the E((X ))-vector
space structure given by f (X ) · y = f (X p )y so that D is an E((X ))-vector
space of dimension pd. Let ψ j : D → D be the map y → ψ((1 + X )− j y), so
that ψ j :
D → D is a surjective linear map. Its kernel is therefore of dimension
p−1
pd − d and N = ∩i=1 ker ψ j is an E((X ))-vector space of dimension at least
pd − ( p − 1)d = d. The non-degeneracy of M implies that ψ : N → D is
injective, so that dim N = d and ψ : N → D is bijective.
Let ϕ : D → N ⊂ D denote its inverse. It is easily checked that ϕ and give
rise to a (ϕ, )-module structure on D, compatible with the (ψ, )-module
structure on M.
We finish this section with a technical result on regularization by Frobenius.
Let R be a ring equipped with an automorphism ϕ, which is extended to R[[X ]]
by ϕ(X ) = X p .
Lemma 2.7. If P ∈ GLd (R[[X ]]), then there exists a matrix M ∈ GLd (R[[X ]])
such that M −1 Pϕ(M) = P(0) ∈ GLd (R).
Proof. This is a standard result, which is proved by successive approximation:
if there exists a matrix Mi ∈ GLd (R[[X ]]) such that Mi−1 Pϕ(Mi ) = P(0) +
Pi X i + O(X i+1 ) with Pi ∈ Md (R) and if Q i = Pi P(0)−1 , then
(1 + X i Q i )−1 Mi−1 · P · ϕ(Mi (1 + X i Q i )) = P(0) + O(X i+1 ),
so that one can set Mi+1 = Mi · (1 + X i Q i ) and take M = limi →+∞ Mi .
Theorem 2.8. If D is a (ϕ, )-module over E((X )), then V (D) is an E-vector
space of dimension dim(D), and the functor D → V (D) gives rise to an equiv-
alence of categories between the category of (ϕ, )-modules over E((X )) and
the category of E-linear representations of GQ p .
Proof. We give a sketch of Fontaine’s proof. Assume first that E = F p and let
D be a (ϕ, )-module over F p ((X )). If we choose a basis of D and if Mat(ϕ) =
( pi j )1i, jdim(D) in that basis, then the algebra
p
A = F p ((X ))[X 1 , . . . , X dim(D) ]/(X j − pi j X i )1 jdim(D)
i
V = (E ⊗F p ind(ωnh )) ⊗ μλ .
Proof. The proof is the same as in §2.1 of [Ber10a]: by §1.6 of [Ser72], V |IQ p
splits as a direct sum of n tame characters and since V is irreducible, these
characters are transitively permuted by Frobenius, so that they are of level n.
Therefore, there exists a primitive h such that V = ⊕in−1=0 Vi where IQ p acts
pi h
on Vi by ωn . Since ωn extends to Gal(Q p /Q pn ), each Vi is stable under the
pi h
Weil group of Gal(Q p /Q pn ), which then acts on Vi by ωn χi where χi is an
unramified character. The lemma then follows from Frobenius reciprocity.
Modular representations of the Borel 39
Proof. See §2.4 of [Ked08] as well as §3.2 of [Vie12a]. We give a sketch of the
proof. Let F{ϕ ±1 } be the space of polynomials in ϕ and ϕ −1 . Since ϕ : F → F
is not necessarily invertible, F{ϕ ±1 } is not a ring, but it is a left F{ϕ}-module.
If r ∈ R and P ∈ F{ϕ ±1 }, let valr (P) = mini∈Z (val(ai ) + r [i]). Using
successive approximations, we can show that if R ∈ F{ϕ ±1 } and r ∈ R are
such that valr (R − 1) > 0, then there exists P ∈ F{ϕ} and Q ∈ F{ϕ −1 }
such that R = P Q. Using this factorization result, we can now prove that if
P ∈ F{ϕ} and NP(P) has a breakpoint, then P can be factored in F{ϕ}.
40 Laurent Berger and Mathieu Vienney
Note that in general, if P = P1 P2 , then the set of slopes of NP(P) is not the
union of the sets of slopes of NP(P1 ) and NP(P2 ).
We denote by val X the X -adic valuation on E K , by E+ K the ring of integers
of E K for val X and by k K the residue field of E K (it is the residue field of
K (μ p∞ )).
Proposition 2.13. If D is an irreducible (ϕ, )-module over E((X )), then there
exists a finite extension K of Q p , such that E K ⊗EQ p D has a basis in which
Mat(ϕ) belongs to GLd (k K ⊗F p E).
The k K ⊗F p E-module generated by this basis depends only on D, and in
particular it is stable under the action of GQ p given by g(α ⊗ y) = g(α) ⊗
[χcycl (g)](y).
Proof. Let us first show that the k K ⊗F p E-module generated by such a basis
is unique. If M ∈ Md (E K ⊗EQ p E((X ))), then let val X (M) be the minimum of
the valuations of the entries of M.
If E K ⊗EQ p D admits two bases in which Mat(ϕ) ∈ GLd (k K ⊗F p E), then
let P1 and P2 be the two matrices of ϕ and let B ∈ GLd (E K ⊗EQ p E((X ))) be
the change of basis matrix. We then have P2 = B −1 P1 ϕ(B) so that ϕ(B) =
P1−1 B P2 . This implies that val X (ϕ(B)) = val X (B) so that val X (B) = 0,
and hence B ∈ Md (E+ K ⊗E+ E[[X ]]). The same argument applied to B
−1
Qp
shows that B ∈ GLd (E+
K ⊗E+ E[[X ]]). If we write B = B0 + C where
Qp
B0 ∈ GLd (k K ⊗F p E) and val X (C) > 0, then the formula ϕ(B) = P1−1 B P2
implies likewise that val X (C) = +∞ so that C = 0. The k K ⊗F p E-module
generated by these two bases is therefore the same.
We now show the existence of such a basis. We can assume that D is irre-
ducible as a ϕ-module; indeed, if M is an irreducible sub-ϕ-module of D, then
we can write D = in=1 γi (M) with γi ∈ . We can assume that n is minimal,
so that the sum is direct and the existence result for D follows from the result
for each of the ϕ-modules γi (M).
If m ∈ D is non-zero, then it generates D as an E((X )){ϕ}-module since D is
assumed to be irreducible. Let P(ϕ) be a non-zero polynomial of degree dim D
such that P(ϕ)(m) = 0. If P(ϕ) were reducible, then this would correspond to
a non-trivial sub-ϕ-module of D so that P(ϕ) is irreducible and by Proposition
2.12, P(ϕ) is isoclinic. If s is the slope of P(ϕ), then there exists a finite
extension K of Q p and an element y ∈ E K of valuation s/( p − 1). Lemma
2.11 shows that if we replace m by ym, then the resulting polynomial Q(ϕ)
is isoclinic of slope 0. This implies that there exists a basis of E K ⊗EQ p D in
which Mat(ϕ) ∈ GLd ((k K ⊗F p E)[[Y ]]). Lemma 2.7 now implies that there
Modular representations of the Borel 41
Recall that E is a field that is taken with the discrete topology. A topological
E-vector space V is said to be linearly topologized if V is separated
(Hausdorff) and if {0} has a basis of neighborhoods that are all vector spaces.
For example, the discrete topology on V is a linear topology. We denote by
Vecdisc (E) the category whose objects are the E-linear vector spaces with the
discrete topology, with continuous linear maps as morphisms.
We say that an affine subspace W of a linearly topologized E-vector space
V is linearly compact if every family {Wi }i∈I of closed affine subspaces of W
having the finite intersection property has a non-empty intersection. Linearly
compact affine spaces generally enjoy the same properties as compact topo-
logical spaces (see (27) of §II.6 of [Lef42]). For example, a linearly compact
subspace of V is closed in V , its image under a continuous linear map is lin-
early compact, and a product of linearly compact spaces is linearly compact. A
finite dimensional discrete E-vector space is linearly compact. If V is linearly
compact and if W is a closed subspace of V , then W is open in V if and only
if it is of finite codimension.
We say that an E-vector space is of profinite dimension if it is an inverse
limit of finite dimensional discrete E-vector spaces. For example, E[[X ]] with
the X -adic topology is of profinite dimension. Such a space is then lin-
early compact and conversely, by (32) of §II.6 of [Lef42], linearly compact
spaces are profinite dimensional. We denote by Veccomp (E) the category whose
objects are the linearly compact E-vector spaces, with continuous linear maps
as morphisms.
If V is a topological vector space, we denote by V ∗ its continuous dual. This
space is given a linear topology by choosing as a basis of neighborhoods of {0}
the set {E ⊥ } E where E runs through all linearly compact subspaces of V , and
E ⊥ = { f ∈ V ∗ such that f (v) = 0 for all v ∈ E}.
Theorem 2.16. The duality functor V → V ∗ gives rise to equivalences of
categories Vecdisc (E) → Veccomp (E) and Veccomp (E) → Vecdisc (E).
Moreover, the natural map V → (V ∗ )∗ is an isomorphism.
Proof. See (29) in §II.6 of [Lef42].
We now turn to group representations. Let G be a topological group and
G (E) and VecG
let Vecdisc comp (E) denote the categories of continuous E-linear
representations of G on either discrete or linearly compact spaces. If V is a
representation of G, then V ∗ is a representation of G, with the usual action
given by (g f )(v) = f (g −1 v).
Proposition 2.17. If V ∈ Vecdisc G (E) or V ∈ VecG
comp (E) is topologically
irreducible, then so is its dual V ∗ .
Modular representations of the Borel 43
4. Colmez’s functor
In this section, we recall Colmez’s construction of representations of B =
B2 (Q p ) starting from Galois representations (see §III of [Col10a]).
If M is a (ψ, )-module, then we denote by lim M the set of sequences
←−ψ
{m n }n∈Z where m n ∈ M and ψ(m n+1 ) = m n for all n ∈ Z. Let χ : Q× p →
E × be a smooth character. We endow lim M with an action of B in the
← −ψ
following way
z 0 −1
0 z · y = χ (z) yi ;
i
0 p ·y = yi−1 = ψ(yi );
1 0
i
1 0 −1
0 a · y i = [a ](yi );
1 z pi+ j z
0 1 · y i = ψ ((1 + X ) yi+ j ), for i + j −val(z).
j
Modular representations of the Borel 45
5. Representations of B2 (Q p )
In this section, we prove that every infinite dimensional smooth irreducible
representation of B having a central character is of the form χ (V ) for some
V and χ. We start by studying representations of B. Let Z = {a · Id, a ∈ Q× p}
be the center of B, and let
Z× Zp
K = B2 (Z p ) = p
.
0 Z× p
If β ∈ Q p and δ ∈ Z, let
1 β
gβ,δ = .
0 pδ
Modular representations of the Borel 47
Proof. This is theorem 1.2.3 of [Ber10a]; we recall the proof here. The group
I1 defined by
1 + pZ p Zp
I1 =
0 1 + pZ p
the characters of F× ×
p × F p and since Z acts through a character by hypothesis,
there exists a character σ of KZ and v ∈ such that k · v = σ (k)v for k ∈ KZ.
By Frobenius reciprocity, we get a non-trivial map indBKZ σ → and this map
is surjective since is irreducible.
Since
n n
p a b 1 p −n bd −1 a 0 p 0
= ,
0 d 0 p −n 0 d 0 pn
+
(indB
KZ σ ) is the set of f = α(β, δ)[gβ,δ ] with δ 0 and β ∈ p −δ Z p /Z p .
+
Lemma 2.29. If y = β∈A,δ∈Z α(β, δ)[gβ,δ ] ∈ (indKZ σ ) , then y ∈
B
1 1 +
( 0 1 − Id) · (indBKZ σ ) if and only if β∈A α(β, δ) = 0 for all δ 0.
1 1
Proof. We have 0 1 [gβ,δ ] = [gβ+ p−δ ,δ ] so that
X· α(β, δ)[gβ,δ ] = (α(β − p −δ , δ) − α(β, δ))[gβ,δ ].
β∈ A,δ∈Z β∈A,δ∈Z
Since β ∈ p −δ Zp /Z p , the lemma follows from the fact that the image of the
δ
map (xi )i → (xi−1 − xi )i from E Z/ p Z to itself is the set of sequences (xi )i
with i xi = 0.
Write F = 0p 01 and X = 10 11 − Id so that A = E[[X ]] is the completed
group ring of 10 Z1p and let A{F} be the non-commutative ring of polyno-
mials in F with coefficients in A, where F X = X p F. If = indB KZ σ/R is a
quotient of indB σ , let + denote the image of (indB σ )+ in . The space +
KZ KZ
is then a left A{F}-module, as well as a torsion A-module (since is smooth).
Recall (see §3 of [Eme08]) that an admissible A-module is an A-module M
that is torsion and such that M X=0 is finite dimensional.
Proposition 2.30. If M is a finitely generated left A{F}-module that is tor-
sion over A, then M is admissible as an A-module if and only if the quotient
M/ X M is finite dimensional over E.
Proof. This is proposition 3.5 of [Eme08].
Modular representations of the Borel 49
(which arises from “retracting the building to the apartment”) gives rise to an
isomorphism of A{F}-modules (indB +
KZ σ ) / X = E[F].
References
[BC08] L. B ERGER & P. C OLMEZ – “Familles de représentations de de Rham et
monodromie p-adique”, Astérisque (2008), no. 319, 303–337, Représen-
tations p-adiques de groupes p-adiques. I. Représentations galoisiennes et
(ϕ, )-modules.
[Ber10a] L. B ERGER – “On some modular representations of the Borel subgroup of
GL2 (Q p )”, Compos. Math. 146 (2010), no. 1, 58–80.
[Ber10b] L. B ERGER – “Représentations modulaires de GL2 (Q p ) et représentations
galoisiennes de dimension 2”, Astérisque (2010), no. 330, 263–279.
[Ber12] L. B ERGER – “Central characters for smooth irreducible modular rep-
resentations of GL2 (Q p )”, Rend. Semin. Mat. Univ. Padova 128 (2012),
1–6.
[BH06] C. J. B USHNELL & G. H ENNIART – The local Langlands conjecture
for GL(2), Grundlehren der Mathematischen Wissenschaften, vol. 335,
Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 2006.
Modular representations of the Borel 51
Abstract
This chapter surveys six different special value formulae for p-adic L-
functions, stressing their common features and their eventual arithmetic
applications via Kolyvagin’s theory of “Euler systems”, in the spirit of
Coates–Wiles and Kato–Perrin-Riou.
Contents
Introduction page 52
1 Classical examples 54
1.1 Circular units 54
1.2 Elliptic units 61
1.3 Heegner points 70
2 Euler systems of Garrett–Rankin–Selberg type 74
2.1 Beilinson–Kato elements 76
2.2 Beilinson–Flach elements 83
2.3 Gross–Kudla–Schoen cycles 88
Conclusion 94
References 98
Introduction
This chapter surveys six different special value formulae for p-adic
L-functions, stressing their common features and their eventual arithmetic
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
52
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 53
Ever since the seminal work of Kolyvagin [Ko], there have been many pro-
posals for axiomatising and classifying the Euler systems that should arise in
nature (cf. [Ru], [PR3], [Cz1], [Cz2], [MR], . . .) with the goal of understand-
ing them more conceptually and systematising the process whereby arithmetic
information is coaxed from their behaviour. The present survey is less ambi-
tious, focussing instead on six settings where the associated global objects
have been constructed unconditionally, attempting to organise them coher-
ently, and suggesting that they arise from two rather than six fundamentally
distinct classes of examples. Like the ten plagues of Egypt in the Jewish
Passover Haggadah, Euler Systems can surely be counted in many ways. The
authors believe (and certainly hope) that their “two trilogies” are but the first
instalments of a richer story in which higher-dimensional cycles on Shimura
varieties and p-adic families of automorphic forms are destined to play an
important role.
1. Classical examples
1.1. Circular units
Let χ : (Z/N Z)× −→ C×
be a primitive, non-trivial even Dirichlet character
of conductor N . The values of the Dirichlet L-function L(s, χ ) at the negative
odd integers belong to the field Qχ ⊂ Q̄ generated by the values of χ. This
can be seen by realising L(1 − k, χ ) for even k ≥ 2 as the constant term of the
holomorphic Eisenstein series
∞
E k,χ (q) := L(1−k, χ )+2 σk−1,χ (n)q n , σk−1,χ (n) := χ (d)d k−1
n=1 d|n
(3.1)
of weight k, level N and character χ, and invoking the q-expansion principle
to argue that the constant term in (3.1) inherits the rationality properties of the
coefficients σk−1,χ (n).
If p is any prime (possibly dividing N ), the ordinary p-stabilisation
( p)
E k,χ (q) := E k,χ (q) − χ ( p) p k−1 E k,χ (q p ) (3.2)
has Fourier expansion given by
∞
( p) ( p)
E k,χ (q) = L p (1 − k, χ ) + 2 σk−1,χ (n)q n , (3.3)
n=1
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 55
where
( p)
L p (1−k, χ ) = (1−χ ( p) p k−1 )L(1−k, χ ), σk−1,χ (n) = χ (d)d k−1 .
pd|n
(3.4)
For each n ≥ 1, the function on Z sending k to the n-th Fourier coefficient
( p)
σk−1,χ (n) extends to a p-adic analytic function of k ∈ (Z/( p − 1)Z) × Z p .
The article [Se] explains why the constant term of (3.3) inherits the same
property. The resulting extension to Z/( p − 1)Z × Z p of L p (s, χ ), defined
a priori as a function on the negative odd integers, is the Kubota–Leopoldt
p-adic L-function attached to χ. The elegant construction of L p (s, χ ) arising
from this circle of ideas (and its subsequent extension to totally real fields)
was one of the original motivations for the theory of p-adic modular forms
initiated in [Se].
The collection of eigenforms in (3.3) is a prototypical example of a p-adic
family of modular forms, whose specialisations at even integers k ≤ 0, while
not classical, continue to admit a geometric interpretation as p-adic modular
forms1 of weight k and level N0 , the prime-to- p part of N . When k = 0,
these are just rigid analytic functions on the ordinary locus A ⊂ X 1 (N0 )(C p )
obtained by deleting from X 1 (N0 )(C p ) all the residue discs attached to super-
singular elliptic curves in characteristic p. In particular, the special value
L p (1, χ ) can be interpreted as the value at the cusp ∞ of such a rigid analytic
function, namely the weight 0 Eisenstein series
⎛ ⎞
∞
( p) ⎝
E 0,χ (q) = L p (1, χ ) + 2 χ (d)d −1 ⎠ q n . (3.5)
n=1 pd|n
An independent expression for this function can be derived in terms of the
Siegel units ga ∈ OY×1 (N ) attached to a fixed choice of primitive N -th root of
unity ζ and a parameter 1 ≤ a ≤ N − 1, whose q-expansions are given by
"
ga (q) = q 1/12 (1 − ζ a ) (1 − q n ζ a )(1 − q n ζ −a ). (3.6)
n>0
More precisely, let be the canonical lift of Frobenius on A which sends the
point corresponding to the pair (E, t) ∈ A to the pair (E/C, t + C) where
C ⊂ E(C p ) is the canonical subgroup of order p in E. The rigid analytic
function
( p) −p
ga := ∗ (ga )ga = g pa (q p )ga (q)− p (3.7)
maps the ordinary locus A to the residue disc of 1 in C p , and therefore its
( p)
p-adic logarithm log p ga is a rigid analytic function on A, with q-expansion
given by
1 They are even overconvergent, but this stronger property will not be exploited here.
56 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
⎛ ⎞
∞
ζ ad + ζ −ad
( p) 1 − ζ ap
log p ga = log p +p ⎝ ⎠ qn.
(1 − ζ a ) p d
n=1 pd|n
Letting
N −1
g(χ ) = χ (a)ζ a (3.8)
a=1
denote the Gauss sum attached to χ, a direct computation shows that the rigid
analytic function on A given by
N −1
1 ( p)
h (χp) := × χ −1 (a) log p ga (3.9)
pg(χ −1 )
a=1
Proof. Comparing q-expansions in (3.5) and (3.10) shows that the difference
( p) ( p)
E 0,χ − h χ is constant on the residue disc of a cusp, and hence on all of A
since it is rigid analytic on this domain. In fact,
( p)
E 0,χ = h (χp) , (3.11)
Remark: Recall the customary notations in which E k (ψ, χ ) denotes the Eisen-
stein series attached to a pair (ψ, χ ) of Dirichlet characters, having the
q-expansion
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 57
⎛ ⎞
∞
E k (ψ, χ ) = δψ=1 L(1 − k, ψχ ) + 2 ⎝ ψ(n/d)χ (d)d k−1 ⎠ q n ,
n=1 d|n
a=1
we find that
#
F u χ ,n if n ≥ 1,
Norm Fχχ ,n+1 (u χ ,n+1 ) =
,n u χ ⊗ (1 − χ −1 ( p)) if n = 0.
After viewing χ as a C p -valued character, let Z p,χ be the ring generated
over Z p by the values of χ (endowed with the trivial G Q -action) and let
58 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
Z p,χ (χ ) be the free module of rank one over Z p,χ on which G Q acts via
the character χ. More generally, denote by Z p,χ (m)(χ ) the m-th Tate twist
of Z p,χ (χ ), on which G Q acts via the m-th power of the cyclotomic character
times χ . The symbols Q p,χ , Q p,χ (χ ), and Q p,χ (m)(χ ) are likewise given the
obvious meaning. The images
where
The Galois module cyc can be viewed as a p-adic interpolation of the Tate
twists Z p (k) for all k ∈ Z. More precisely, given k ∈ Z and a Dirichlet
character ξ of p-power conductor, let νk,ξ : −→ Z p,ξ be the ring homo-
morphism sending the group-like element a ∈ Z× p to a
k−1 ξ −1 (a). It induces a
Gal(Q̄ /F )
where the Tate–Sen isomorphism F p,η = C p p p,η
has been used to make
the last identification.
The module DC p (Q p,η (η)) := (C p ⊗Q p,η Q p,η (η))G Q p appearing as the
target in (3.13) is the Dieudonné module (with C p as “period ring”) attached
to the Artin representation Q p,η (η). It is a one-dimensional Q p,η -vector space
generated by the “Gauss sum”
m−1
g(η) = ζma ⊗ η(a)
a=1
which can thus be viewed as a “ p-adic period” attached to the Galois represen-
tation Q p,η (η). Theorem 3.1 can be re-phrased as the following relationship
between the classes κ1,χ ξ and the values of the Kubota–Leopoldt L-function
at s = 1, twisted eventually by finite order characters:
(after extending the map logχ ξ by linearity.) Note in particular that the global
classes κ1,χ ξ determine the Kubota–Leopoldt L-function completely, since an
element of the Iwasawa algebra has finitely many zeros.
For all k ≥ 1 and characters η of conductor prime to p (with η( p) = 1
when k = 1), Bloch and Kato have defined a generalisation of the map logη of
(3.13) for the representation Q p,η (k)(η), in which C p is replaced by the larger
Fontaine period ring BdR :
60 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
(See for instance [Kato], [Cz1, §2.6]; we have implicitly used the fact
that for k ≥ 1, all extensions of Q p by Q p (k) are crystalline, and that
Fil0 DdR (Q p,η (k)(η)) = 0.) The target of the logarithm map is a one-
dimensional Q p,η -vector space with a canonical generator t −k g(η), where t ∈
BdR is Fontaine’s p-adic analogue of 2πi on which G Q p acts as σ t = χcyc (σ )t.
The Bloch–Kato logarithm logk,η with k = 1 is related to the map logη of
(3.13) by the formula
logη = t log1,η ,
(1 − χ ( p) p −k ) (−t)k
L p (k, χ ) = × × logk,χ (κk,χ ). (3.16)
(1 − χ ( p) p ) (k − 1)!g(χ −1 )
−1 k−1
(1 − χ ( p) p −k ) (−k)!t k
L p (k, χ ) = − × × exp∗k,χ (κk,χ ). (3.18)
(1 − χ −1 ( p) p k−1 ) g(χ −1 )
Equations (3.16) and (3.18) give a satisfying intepretation of L p (k, χ ) at all
integers k ∈ Z in terms of the global classes κk,χ . In particular the global
classes κk,χ are non-trivial, and in fact non-crystalline, whenever L p (k, χ ) = 0
and k < 0. Since k is then in the region of classical interpolation defining
L p (s, χ ), the non-vanishing of L p (k, χ ) is directly related to the behaviour
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 61
where g(χ̄) is the Gauss sum defined in (3.8), and the superscript indicates
that the sum is to be taken over the non-zero lattice vectors in N Z × Z.
Assume for simplicity that K has class number one, trivial unit group O×K =
±1, and odd discriminant D < 0. Assume also that there is an integral ideal –
and hence, an element n of O K – satisfying
O K /n = Z/N Z. (3.20)
One then says that the Eisenstein series E k,χ satisfies the Heegner hypothesis
relative to K . Under this hypothesis, the even character χ gives rise to a finite
order character χn of conductor n on the ideals of K by the rule
After writing
√ √
b+ D b+ D
τn = , where n = ZN + Z , (3.22)
2N 2
62 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
and (3.26). The fact that all the coefficients in the Fourier expansion (3.3)
( p)
of E k,χ extend to p-adic analytic functions of k on weight space W =
Z/( p − 1)Z × Z p and that the pair (A, tn ) belongs to A suggests that the
right-hand side of (3.27), normalised by a suitable p-adic period, should admit
a similar prolongation. More precisely, the formal completion  of AOC p along
its identity section is isomorphic to the formal multiplicative group Ĝm , and
upon choosing an isomorphism ı : Â −→ Ĝm we may define a p-adic period
p ∈ C× p by the rule
ω A = p · ωcan ,
where ωcan := ı ∗ dtt , with dtt the canonical differential on Ĝm , plays the role of
the complex differential dz in the p-adic setting. The function L p (K , χn , k)
of k defined by
( p) ( p)
L p (K , χn , k) = E k,χ (A, tn , ωcan ) = kp · E k,χ (A, tn , ω A ), (3.28)
extends to a p-adic analytic function of k ∈ W and is equal (up to the p-adic
period kp ) to the right-hand side of (3.27) for all integers k ≥ 2. It is called
the Katz one-variable p-adic L-function attached to K and to the character χn .
( p)
Recall the Siegel units ga and ga defined in Equations (3.6) and (3.7) of
Section 1.1. Evaluating these functions at the pair (A, tn ) gives rise to the
elliptic units
( p) ( p) ( p) σ −p
p
u a,n := ga (A, tn ) = ga (τn ), u a,n := ga (A, tn ) = ga (τpn ) = u a,n
in O×
K n (μ N ) , where σp ∈ Gal(K n (μ N )/K ) denotes the Frobenius element at p.
The following result of Katz (as well as its proof) is the direct counterpart of
Leopoldt’s formula (Theorem 3.1) in which cusps are replaced by CM points
and circular units by elliptic units.
Theorem 3.2 (Katz). Let χ be a non-trivial even primitive Dirichlet charac-
ter of conductor N and let K be a quadratic imaginary field equipped with
an ideal n satisfying O K /n = Z/N Z. Let χn be the ideal character of K
associated to the pair (χ , n) as in (3.21). Then
N −1
(1 − χn (p) p −1 ) −1
L p (K , χn , 0) = − × χ (a) log p u a,n .
g(χ̄)
a=1
Proof. Setting k = 0 in (3.28) gives
( p)
L p (K , χn , 0) = E 0,χ (A, tn ),
( p) ( p)
where E 0,χ (A, tn ) refers to E 0,χ (A, tn , ω) for any choice of regular differen-
tial ω on A, since E 0,χ is of weight zero and this value is therefore independent
of ω. But by Equations (3.11) and (3.9) in the proof of Theorem 3.1,
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 65
N −1
( p) 1 ( p)
E 0,χ ( A, tn ) = h (χp) (A, tn ) = × χ −1 (a) log p ga (A, tn )
pg(χ̄)
a=1
N −1
1 σ −p
= × χ −1 (a) log p u a,n
p
pg(χ̄)
a=1
N −1
χn (p) − p −1
= × χ (a) log p u a,n .
pg(χ̄)
a=1
The theorem follows.
The calculations above can be extended by introducing the Katz two-
variable p-adic L-function L p (K , χn , k1 , k2 ) which interpolates the values of
L(K , χn , k1 , k2 ) as k1 and k2 both vary over weight space. These more gen-
eral L-values are related to the values at CM points of the non-holomorphic
Eisenstein series
(k1 − 1)!
E k1 ,k2 ,χ (τ ) =N k1 +k2 g(χ̄)−1 (τ − τ̄ )k2
(2πi)k1
χ̄ (n)
(mτ + n)k1 (m τ̄ + n)k2
(m,n)∈N Z×Z
f (τn )
f (A, tn , ω A ) := belongs to L K n . (3.31)
(n̄ K )k
A conceptual explanation for this striking algebraicity result rests on the rela-
tionship between nearly holomorphic modular forms of weight k and global
sections of an algebraic vector bundle arising from the relative de Rham
cohomology of the universal elliptic curve over Y1 (N ), and on the resulting
interpretation of the Shimura–Maass derivative in terms of the Gauss–Manin
connection on this vector bundle. See for instance Section 1.5 of [BDP] or Sec-
tion 2.4 of [DR1] for a brief account of this circle of ideas, and Section 10.1 of
[Hi2] for a more elementary treatment.
Specialising (3.31) to the setting where f is the Eisenstein series E k+r,−r,χ
of weight k + 2r with k ≥ 2 and r ≥ 0, and invoking (3.29) leads to the
conclusion that the special values
(k + r − 1)! √ −r
E k+r,−r,χ (A, tn , ω A ) = nk+r n̄−r g(χ̄)−1 D
(2π i)k+r k+2r
K
L(K , χn , k + r, −r ) (3.32)
The reason, which is explained for instance in Section 1.5 of [BDP], is that d
admits the same algebraic description as δk in terms of the Gauss–Manin con-
nection on a relative de Rham cohomology sheaf, with the sole difference that
the (non-holomorphically varying) Hodge decomposition on the complex de
Rham cohomology of the fibers is replaced in the p-adic setting by the Frobe-
nius decomposition of the de Rham cohomology of the universal (ordinary)
elliptic curve over A. But the functorial action of the endomorphism algebra
on algebraic de Rham cohomology causes these two decompositions to agree
for ordinary CM elliptic curves.
Equation (3.33) means that, as far as values at ordinary CM triples are con-
cerned, the p-adic modular form d r E k,χ is a perfect substitute for E k+r,−r,χ =
δkr E k,χ . The Fourier expansion of this p-adic avatar is given, for r ≥ 1, by
∞
d r E k,χ = n r σk−1,χ (n)q n . (3.34)
n=1
[ p] [ p]
so that E k+r,−r,χ := δkr E k,χ – a nearly holomorphic modular form of level
N p 2 – is given by
[ p]
while its p-adic avatar d r E k,χ – a p-adic modular form of level N – has Fourier
expansion
∞
[ p]
d r E k,χ = n r σk−1,χ (n)q n .
pn
L p (K , χn , k + r, −r ) [ p]
:= d r E k,χ (A, tn , ω A )
k+2r
p
[ p] p̄−2
n
= E k+r,−r,χ C/Z + Zτp2 n , 2 , p̄ n̄ K dz
2
p N
= (1 − χn−1 (p)pk+r p̄−r / p) × (1 − χn (p̄)pr p̄−k−r ) × (3.37)
(k + r − 1)! √ −r
nk+r n̄−r g(χ̄)−1 D L(K , χn , k + r, −r )
(2πi)k+r k+2r
K
L p (K , χn , k, 0) = (1 − χn (p̄)p̄−k )L p (K , χn , k).
The ratio of the two sides (which can be seen to be a p-adic analytic function
of k, since p̄ belongs to O×
K p ) reflects the difference between working with the
( p) [ p]
ordinary p-stabilisation E k,χ and the p-depletion E k,χ .
The following variant of Katz’s Theorem 3.2 expresses the special value
L p (K , χn−1 , 1, 1) in terms of the elliptic units u ∗a,n := ga (w(A, tn )), where w
is the Atkin–Lehner involution such that ga (w(A, tn )) = ga (−1/N τn ).
N −1
L p (K , χn−1 , 1, 1) = (1 − χn−1 (p̄))(1 − χn (p)/ p) × χ −1 (a) log p u ∗a,n .
a=1
The p-adic modular form of weight 0 which appears on the right-hand side of
this identity has the same Fourier expansion as the p-depletion of the Eisen-
stein series E 0 (χ −1 , 1) introduced in the remark following Theorem 3.1 of
Section 1. Combined with [Hi1, Lemma 5.3], we thus see that
[ p]
L p (K , χn−1 , 1, 1) = g(χ̄)w E 0,χ (A, tn , ω A ),
are (formal Qχ -linear combination of) special units in K n lying in the χn−1 -
eigenspace for the natural action of G K .
These units arise as the “bottom layer” of a norm-coherent family of elliptic
units over the two-variable Z p -extension K ∞ of K . The same construction as
in Equation (3.12) of Section 1.1 leads to a global cohomology class
κχn ,∞ ∈ H 1 (K , K (χn )),
where K = Z p [[Gal(K ∞ /K )]] is the two-variable Iwasawa algebra attached
to K , equipped with its tautological G K -action. The Galois module K (χn )
gives a p-adic interpolation of the Hecke characters of the form χn φ where φ
is a Hecke character of p-power conductor.
In particular, if ψ is a Hecke character of infinity type (k1 , k2 ) arising as a
specialisation of K (χn ), the global class
κψ ∈ H 1 (K , Q p (ψ))
obtained by specialising κχn ,∞ at ψ, although it arises from elliptic units,
encodes arithmetic information about a Galois representation Vψ of K attached
to a Hecke character of possible infinite order.
The reciprocity law of Coates and Wiles expresses the Katz two-variable
p-adic L-function L p (K , χn , k1 , k2 ) as the image under a “big exponential
map” of the global class κn,∞ . By an analogue of (3.18) of Section 1.1, the
special value L(ψ −1 , 0) can then be interpreted as the obstruction to the class
κψ being cristalline at p, whenever ψ lies in the range of classical interpolation
for the Katz p-adic L-function.
A classical result of Deuring asserts that the p-adic Tate module of a CM
elliptic curve, viewed as a representation of G K , is always of the form Vψ
for a suitable Hecke character ψ of K of infinity type (1, 0). The global
class κψ for such a ψ acquires a special interest in relation to the Birch and
Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture for the elliptic curve Aψ attached to it. This con-
nection between L(Aψ , 1) and the singular parts of global classes κψ was used
by Coates–Wiles to give what historically was the first broad piece of con-
vincing supporting evidence for the conjecture of Birch and Swinnerton-Dyer,
notably the implication
L(A, 1) = 0 =⇒ A(K ) ⊗ Q = {0},
for any elliptic curve A/Q with complex multiplication by K .
70 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
which belong to K n for all r ≥ 0. The role of the relatively elementary for-
mula (3.32) of Section 1.2 relating such quantities to L-values when f is an
Eisenstein series is played in this context by a seminal formula of Waldspurger,
whose importance for the arithmetic study of generalised Heegner cycles and
points would be hard to overstate, even though its proof lies beyond the scope
of this survey.
Waldspurger’s formula relates (3.38) to the L-function of f twisted (over K )
by certain unramified Hecke characters of K . If φ is such a character (viewed
as a mutiplicative function on fractional ideals of K in the usual way) then
the L-series L( f, K , φ, s) of f /K twisted by φ is defined (for s ∈ C in some
right-half plane) by the Euler product
"$ %−1
L( f, K , φ, s) = (1 − αNl ( f ) · φ(l)Nl−s )(1 − βNl ( f ) · φ(l)Nl−s )
l
taken over the prime ideals l in O K , where α! ( f ) and β! ( f ) are the roots of the
Hecke polynomial x 2 − a! ( f )x + !k−1 for f at !, and we set αNl := α! ( f )t
and βNl := β! ( f )t if Nl = !t . Rankin’s method can be used to show that
L( f, K , φ, s) admits an analytic continuation to the entire complex plane.
If k1 and k2 are integers with the same parity, let φk1 ,k2 be the unramified
Hecke character of K of infinity type (k1 , k2 ) defined on fractional ideals by
the rule
φk1 ,k2 ((α)) = α k1 ᾱ k2 , (3.39)
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 71
and set
L( f, K , k1 , k2 ) := L( f, K , φk−1
1 ,k2
, 0).
Because
L( f, K , k1 + s, k2 + s) = L( f, K , φk−1
1 ,k2
, s),
L p ( f, K , 1, 1) = d −1 f [ p] (A, tn , ω A )2 . (3.45)
As in the proof of Theorems 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3, the result will be obtained by
interpreting the p-adic modular function F [ p] := d −1 f [ p] as the rigid analytic
primitive of the differential ω f [ p] on A which vanishes at the cusp ∞, and
relating this rigid analytic function to the Coleman primitive of ω f .
Recall the lift of Frobenius on the ordinary locus A ⊂ X 0 (N )(C p ). A
direct computation shows that
ω f = pωV f (3.46)
F [ p] (A, tn ) = (1 − a p ( f )/ p + 1/ p)F(A, tn ).
Like circular units and elliptic units, the Heegner point PK , f ∈ E(K )
arises naturally as a universal norm of a compatible system of points
defined over the so-called anticyclotomic Z p -extension of K . This exten-
sion, denoted K ∞ − , is contained in the two-variable Z -extension K
p ∞ of
Section 1.2 and is the largest subextension which is Galois over Q and for
which Gal(K /Q) acts as −1 on Gal(K ∞ − /K ) via conjugation. After letting
− − /K )]] be the Iwasawa algebra attached to this extension,
K = Z p [[Gal(K ∞
equipped with its tautological action of G K , this norm-compatible collection of
Heegner points can be parlayed into the construction of a global cohomology
class
κ f,K ,∞ ∈ H 1 (K , V p (E) ⊗ −
K ),
I ( f, g, h) := f, g × δm
r
h,
and relates the square of this quantity to the central critical value L( f ⊗ g ⊗
h, k+!+m−2
2 ) of the convolution L-function attached to f , g and h. An over-
arching theme of Section 2 is that the quantity I ( f, g, h) can be p-adically
interpolated as f , g and h are made to vary over a suitable set of classical
specialisations of Hida families. In particular, when f , g and h are of weight
two, forcing r to tend p-adically to −1 in weight space, the resulting p-adic
limit of I ( f, g, h), denoted I p ( f, g, h) – a p-adic L-value – acquires an inter-
pretation as the Bloch–Kato p-adic logarithm of a global cohomology class
arising from a suitable geometric construction, thereby motivating the study of
the following Euler systems:
reg p {u g , u h }(η f ),
were u g and u h are the modular units whose logarithmic derivatives are
equal to g and h respectively, {u g , u h } ∈ K 2 (X 1 (N )) is the Beilinson ele-
ment in the second K -group of X 1 (N ) formed essentially by taking the
cup-product of these two units, and η f is a suitable class in HdR 1 (X (N ))
1
attached to f . The p-adic regulator has a counterpart in p-adic étale coho-
mology and the images of the Beilinson elements under this map lead to
a system of global cohomology classes which underlie Kato’s study of the
Mazur–Swinnerton-Dyer p-adic L-function attached to classical modular
forms via the theory of Euler systems.
(2) When only h is an Eisenstein series and f and g are cuspidal, the invariant
I p ( f, g, h) is again related, in Section 2.2, to a p-adic regulator of the form
(3) When f , g and h are all cusp forms, the invariant I p ( f, g, h) is related in
Section 2.3 to
AJ p (")(η f ∧ ωg ∧ ωh ),
where
AJ p : CH2 (X 1 (N )3 )0 −→ Fil2 (HdR
3
(X 1 (N )3 ))∨
{u 1 , u 2 } ∈ K 2 (Ȳ ) ⊗ Q
Before stating the main theorem of this section, we recall the definition
of the p-adic regulator, following [Bes3] and [BD1], to which we refer for
more detailed explanations. This definition builds on the techniques of p-adic
integration that played a crucial role in the preceding sections.
As in Section 1.1, let A be the ordinary locus of Y (viewed here as a rigid
analytic curve over C p ), obtained by removing both the supersingular and the
cuspidal residue discs. It is equipped with a system of wide open neighbour-
hoods W# in the terminology of Coleman, as described for example in [DR1]
and [BD1]. Let be the canonical lift of Frobenius on the collection of W# ,
and let × be the corresponding lift of Frobenius on W# × W# . Choose a
polynomial P(t) ∈ Q[t] satisfying
● P( × ) annihilates the class of du
u1 ⊗
1 du 2
u2
2 (W × W ),
in Hrig # #
● 1 (W ).
P() acts invertibly on Hrig #
where δ(w) := (w, w), h x (w) := (w, x) and vx (w) := (x, w) are the
diagonal, horizontal and vertical inclusions of W# in W#2 , respectively. As
explained in [BD1], the image ξ P,x of ξ̃ P,x in Hrig1 (W ) does not depend
#
on the choice of a form ρ P satisfying Equation (3.49). Moreover, setting
ξx := P()−1 ξ P,x ∈ Hrig 1 (W ) in view of the second condition on P, one
#
shows that the class ξx is independent of the choice of P. Write
spl X : Hrig
1
(W# ) −→ HdR
1
(X )
for the canonical Frobenius equivariant splitting of the exact sequence induced
1 (X ) into H 1 (W ). As is shown in [BD1], the
by the natural inclusion of HdR rig #
image ξ := spl X (ξx ) of ξx under spl X does not depend on the choice of the
base point x. The p-adic regulator of {u 1 , u 2 } is defined as
reg p {u 1 , u 2 } := ξ ∈ HdR
1
(X ). (3.50)
78 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
Write α p ( f ), resp. β p ( f ) for the unit, resp. non-unit root of the Frobenius
polynomial x 2 − a p ( f )x + p associated to f . Consider the unit root subspace
1
HdR (X ) f,ur ⊂ HdR
1
(X ) f
way (cf. [BD1], Sections 2.5 and 3.1 for more details). First, we define an
anti-holomorphic differential
ηah −1 ¯
f := f, f 2,N · f (z)d z̄. (3.53)
The differential ηah f gives rise to a class in HdR (X C ), whose natural image in
1
L( f, χ , 1)
L p ( f, 2) · = (2i N −2 g(χ ))(1 − β p ( f ) p −2 )(1 − β p ( f ))
+f
· reg p {u χ −1 , u χ }(ηurf )
holds, where +f is a real period attached to f as in Section 2.3 of [BD1], and
g(χ ) is the Gauss sum defined in Equation (3.8).
Remark 3.6. A version of Theorem 3.5 has been obtained by Brunault [Br], as
a consequence of Kato’s reciprocity law [Kato]. A different proof, proposed by
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 79
Bannai–Kings [BK] and Niklas [Nik], relies on the Eisenstein measures intro-
duced by Panchiskine. The approach sketched here is based on the methods of
[BD1], depending crucially on Hida’s p-adic deformation of f .
difference that in this case (and in the cases described in the following sections)
it is a so-called “iterated Coleman integral” that makes its appearance.
As a final step, we remark that the factorisation of complex L-functions
L( f k ⊗ E !,χ , k/2 + ! − 1) = L( f k , k/2 + ! − 1) · L( f k , χ , k/2)
implies directly the factorisation of p-adic L-functions
L p (f, Eχ )(k, !) = η(k) · L p (f, 1)(k, k/2 + ! − 1) · L p (f, χ )(k, k/2), (3.56)
where η(k) is a p-adic analytic function whose exact value at 2 is determined
in Theorem 3.4 of [BD1]. Theorem 3.5 follows by combining Equations (3.55)
and (3.56), given the interpretation of the right-hand side of (3.55) as a p-adic
regulator. This concludes our outline of the proof of Theorem 3.5.
We now turn to a brief discussion of the theory of Euler systems, which in
the current context aims to relate the values of L p ( f, s) at integer points to
a collection of classes in various continuous Galois cohomology groups asso-
ciated to f . Let F be a p-adic field containing the values of χ, and let δχ ±
be the image of u χ ± in Het1 (Y, F(1)) arising from Kummer theory. Define the
( p-adic) étale regulator
reget {u χ −1 , u χ } := δχ −1 ∪ δχ ∈ Het2 (Y, F(2)) = H 1 (Q, Het1 (Ȳ , F(2))),
where the last identification is a consequence of the Hochschild–Serre spectral
sequence. Consider the isomorphism
logY,2 : H 1 (Q p , Het1 (Ȳ , F(2))) −→ DdR (Het1 (Ȳ , F(2))) = HdR
1
(Y/F),
(3.57)
where the first map is the Bloch–Kato logarithm (which is an isomorphism
in our setting), and the second equality follows from the comparison theorem
between étale and de Rham cohomology. The map (3.57) sends the restriction
at p of the étale regulator, denoted reget, p , to the p-adic regulator:
logY,2 (reget, p {u χ −1 , u χ }) = reg p {u χ −1 , u χ } (3.58)
(cf. Proposition 9.11 and Corollary 9.10 of [Bes2]). Thus Theorem 3.5 can
be rephrased as a relation between the value L p ( f, 2) and the Bloch–Kato
logarithm of the étale regulator:
L( f, χ , 1)
L p ( f, 2) · = (2i N −2 g(χ ))(1 − β p ( f ) p −2 )(1 − β p ( f )) (3.59)
+f
× logY,2 (reget, p {u χ −1 , u χ })(ηurf ).
The identity (3.59) should be viewed as the analogue of Equation (3.14) of
Section 1.1. More general versions of (3.59) can be obtained by replacing u χ
82 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
π f : Het1 (Ȳ , F ) −→ V f ,
for the specialisation of κ f,∞ under νk,ξ , it turns out that the image of κ f,ξ (1)
by the Bloch–Kato logarithm encodes the values L p ( f, ξ, 2), thereby gen-
eralising (3.59) (cf. [Kato], (16.6)). In this way, L p ( f, s) can be “read-off”
from the class κ f,∞ . The work [BD2] undertakes the task of obtaining such
a description of L p ( f, s) by extending the techniques of [BD1] outlined
above.
More generally, Perrin–Riou’s description of L p ( f, s) as the image of κ f,∞
by a “big” log-map (interpolating the Bloch–Kato logarithms) allows one
to recover the values L p ( f, ξ, 1 + k) for all k ≥ 1 from the logarithmic
images of the classes κ f,ξ (k) (cf. for example [Br], Theorem 23, [PR2], 3.3.10
and [Cz1]).
Consider now the dual exponential map (in the case k = 0)
When combined with Kolyvagin’s theory of Euler systems, (3.60) implies the
following case of the Birch and Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture (where ξ can be
assumed to be an arbitrary Dirichlet character):
L( f, ξ, 1) = 0 ⇒ Hom(C(ξ ), E(Q̄) ⊗ C) = 0. (3.61)
Here Z ranges over irreducible curves in S, and P ranges over closed points in
S. The map denoted div sends a rational function to its divisor. The map ∂ sends
a symbol { f, g} ∈ K 2 (K (S)) associated to pair of functions x, y ∈ K (S)∗ to
the tame symbol
x ν Z (y)
∂({x, y}) = (u Z ) Z ⊂S , u Z = (−1)ν Z (x)ν Z (y) . (3.64)
y ν Z (x)
Let u ∈ K (X )∗ be a modular unit as in (3.48), i.e. a rational function on X
whose divisor is supported on the cusps. By viewing u as a rational function
on the diagonal " ⊂ S, one can define certain distiguished elements "u ∈
CH2 (S, 1) as follows.
Lemma 3.8. Given a modular unit u on X , there exists an element of the form
"u = (", u) + ai (Z i , u i ) ∈ CH2 (S, 1) ⊗ Q, (3.65)
defined by
&
1
regC (Z i , u i ) (ω) = ω log |u i |,
2πi Z i
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 85
as in (3.53).
The main theorem of [BDR1] is a p-adic analogue of Beilinson’s formula.
Before stating this result, it is worth noting that the very definition of the p-adic
Rankin L-series associated to f ⊗ g is subtle for a reason mentioned before:
the classical Rankin L-series L( f ⊗ g, s) has no critical values. When f and
g are ordinary at a prime p N , Hida showed how to define a p-adic Rankin
L-series as follows. Let f and g denote the Hida families whose weight two
specialisations are f and g, respectively. Then for weights k and ! such that
2 ≤ ! ≤ s ≤ k − 1, the values L imp ( f k ⊗ g! , s) are critical. Hida proved that
there exists a p-adic L-function L p (f, g)(k, !, s) interpolating the values
L imp ( f k ⊗ g! , s)
∈Q for 2 ≤ ! ≤ s ≤ k − 1. (3.66)
(2πi)!+2s−1 f k , f k k,N
Note that the roles of f and g are not symmetric in this definition, and we
therefore obtain two p-adic Rankin L-series associated to f and g, namely:
f g
L p ( f ⊗ g, s) := L p (f, g, 2, 2, s), L p ( f ⊗ g, s) := L p (g, f, 2, 2, s).
where
E( f, g, 2) = (1 − β p ( f )α p (g) p −2 )(1 − β p ( f )β p (g) p −2 )
× (1 − β p ( f )α p (g)χ ( p) p −1 )(1 − β p ( f )β p (g)χ ( p) p −1 )
E( f ) = 1 − β p ( f )2 χ −1
f ( p) p
−2
E ∗ ( f ) = 1 − β p ( f )2 χ −1
f ( p) p
−1
Theorem 3.11 is then deduced by using Besser’s work [Bes4], which relates
the right-hand side of Equation (3.68) to the p-adic regulator.
We conclude this section with a brief discussion of various works in progress
regarding the construction of an Euler system of Beilinson–Flach elements
along the p-power level tower of self-products of modular curves X 1 (N pr ) ×
X 1 (N pr ), along the lines that were suggested in [DR1] and [BDR1]. This Euler
system, which has been developed further by Lei, Loeffler and Zerbes [LLZ]
and in [BDR2], holds the promise of several arithmetic applications.
Firstly, such an Euler system would yield a generalisation of Theorem 3.11
that varies in p-adic families. This generalisation would in particular apply
when f and g have level divisible by p, and s is a general arithmetic weight
(e.g. s(x) = x j ψ(x) for a p-power conductor Dirichlet character ψ and inte-
ger j). Using this generalisation, the fourth author has indicated a proof of a
factorisation of Hida’s p-adic Rankin L-function L p ( f ⊗ f, s) of the Rankin
square into the Coates–Schmidt p-adic L-function of the symmetric square
of f and a Kubota–Leopoldt p-adic L-function [Das]. The approach taken in
[Das] parallels closely the one in [Gr] to factor the restriction to the cyclotomic
line of the Katz p-adic L-function into a product of two Kubota–Leopoldt
p-adic L-functions, but with the Katz L-function replaced by L p ( f ⊗ f, s),
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 87
V E,g := VE ⊗Z p Vg ⊗ cyc ,
where cyc is as in Section 1.1 and the tensor product Vg ⊗ cyc is taken
with respect to a suitable algebra homomorphism → ⊗Z p .
An appropriate generalisation of Theorem 3.11 relates the image of κ E (g)
under the Bloch–Kato logarithm to the p-adic L-function L p (f, g)(k, !, s)
when k = 2.
Let us now suppose that the specialisation of g in weight 1 is a classi-
cal cusp form, and hence its associated Galois representations Vg1 is an odd
2-dimensional Artin representation (i.e. has finite image), which we denote by
ρ. The specialisation of the class κ E (g) in weight 1 need not be crystalline at
p, since it is defined as the specialisation of a p-adic family of classes at a
non-classical weight, and is not directly defined via a geometric construction.
88 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
L p f (f, g, h) : f × g × h −→ C p . (3.69)
See also [DR1, §4] for a description of (3.69) which corrects the Euler factor
in the p-adic interpolation formula arising in [HaTi].
This p-adic L-function interpolates the square-root of the central critical
value of the complex L-function L( f x , g y , h z , s), as (x, y, z) ranges over those
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 89
triples (x, y, z) ∈ f,cl × g,cl × h,cl such that κ(x) ≥ κ(y) + κ(z). To con-
struct L p f (f, g, h), one invokes the work of Garrett [Gar], Harris and Kudla
[HaKu], which shows that these central critical values are equal, up to certain
explicit periods, to the algebraic number
f x∗ , δ t (g y ) × h z N 2
J ( f x , g y , h z ) := ∈ Q̄,
f x∗ , f x∗ N
X 123 − X 12 − X 13 − X 23 + X 1 + X 2 + X 3 ,
3 ∨
AJC : CH2 (X 3 )0 −→ Fil2 HdR
3
(X /C ) /H3 (X 3 (C), Z)
AJsyn, p : CH2 (X 3 )0 −→ Fil HdR (X /Q
2 3 3
p
)∨ (3.70)
AJet, p : CH2 (X 3 )0 −→ H 1 (G Q , Het3 (X 3 , Z p (2))).
/Q̄
mutations of the three variables, the typical element in this space is of the type
η1 ⊗ ω2 ⊗ ω3 , where η1 is a class in HdR 1 (X ) and ω , ω ∈ 1 (X ) are regular
2 3
differential 1-forms. [Bes1, Theorem 1,2] asserts that
&
AJ p (")(η1 ⊗ ω2 ⊗ ω3 ) = η1 ⊗ ω2 ⊗ ω3
"
:= sign(I )tr I (ι∗I (η̃1 ∪ ω̃2 ∪ ω̃3 )), (3.72)
∅ = I ⊆{1,2,3}
While each of the terms tr I (ι∗I (η̃1 ∪ ω̃2 ∪ ω̃3 )) does depend on the choice of
primitives, one checks that their sum does not.
We are finally in position to state the main formula alluded to at the
beginning.
Theorem 3.12. For each φ ∈ { f, g, h}, let ωφ ∈ 1 (X ) denote the regu-
lar 1-form associated to φ, and ηurf ∈ HdR 1 (X ) f,ur be the unique class in
the unit root subspace of the f -isotypical component of HdR 1 (X ) such that
ω f , η f = 1. Let also α p (φ), β p (φ) be the two roots of the Hecke poly-
ur
and, given a rigid analytic primitive ρ ∈ 1rig (W#2 ) of P( × )(ωg ⊗ ωh ) and
the choice of the cusp ∞ at infinity as base point, we set
ξ = (δ ∗ − h ∗∞ − v∞
∗
)ρ ∈ HdR
1
(X ) ⊂ Hrig
1
(W# ).
This is proved in [DR1, Ch. 3] in two steps: a formal calculation permits
us first to relate the image under the Abel–Jacobi map of the diagonal cycle
92 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
tive operator. That the left-hand side of (3.73) equals (3.75), again up to an
explicit p-multiplier, follows from the explicit calculations involved in the very
construction of the p-adic L-function L p f (f, g, h).
We bring (3.75) to the reader’s attention not only because it stands as the
basic bridge between the two sides of the equality in (3.73), but also because
this is a quantity which is amenable to effective numerical approximations,
thanks to the work of A. Lauder (see [Lau] for more details).
This can be used in turn to design algorithms for computing p-adic numer-
ical approximations to Chow–Heegner and Stark–Heegner points on elliptic
curves over various number fields. We refer the reader to [DR2] and the forth-
coming works of the third and sixth author, in collaboration with A. Lauder,
for some of these constructions. To illustrate the method, we just mention here
that the prototypical construction arises when f is taken to be the eigenform
associated to an elliptic curve E/Q and g = h. In this setting Zhang [Zh]
introduced a rational point Pg, f ∈ E(Q), whose formal group logarithm can
be computed as
E1 (g)
logω f (Pg, f ) = −2 ηur , eord (d −1 (g [ p] ) · f ), (3.76)
E(g, g, f ) g
by invoking Theorem 3.12 and the results of [DRS1].
Motivated by the analogies between the description of Pg, f given in [DRS1]
by means of Chen’s complex iterated integrals and the above formula, we refer
to (3.75) as a p-adic iterated integral.
We close this section by discussing briefly the Euler system underlying the
diagonal cycle ", and the arithmetic applications that Theorem 3.12 has in this
context.
Assume f has rational Fourier coefficients and trivial nebentypus, and let
E/Q be the (isogeny class of the) elliptic curve associated to it by the Eichler–
Shimura construction. If instead of applying the p-adic syntomic Abel–Jacobi
map, one considers the image of " under the p-adic étale Abel–Jacobi map
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 93
AJet, p recalled in (3.70), one obtains a global cohomology class with values
in Het3 (X 3 , Z p (2)). After projecting to the ( f, g, h)-isotypical component of
/Q̄
this Galois module, we obtain an element
κ E (g, h) ∈ H 1 (Q, V p (E) ⊗ Vg ⊗ Vh (1)), (3.77)
where, for any of the forms φ = f, g, h, Vφ := Het1 (X /Q̄ , Z p )φ and V p (E)
V f (1) is the Galois representation associated to the p-adic Tate module of E.
Let now φ be the finite extension of the Iwasawa algebra = Z p [[Z× p ]]
corresponding to the space φ as considered at the beginning of the section
for φ = f . Hida constructed a rank two Galois representation Vφ over φ ,
interpolating the Galois representations associated by Deligne to each of the
classical specialisations of φ.
As in §1.1, let cyc denote the -adic Galois representation whose under-
lying module is itself, equipped with the Galois action induced by the
character
χcyc
Gal (Q̄/Q) −→ Gal (Q(μ p∞ )/Q) −→ Z× ×
p → ,
where χcyc is the cyclotomic character and the latter inclusion maps an element
z ∈ Z× ×
p to the corresponding group-like element [z] ∈ . Define
classical. Indeed, assume that for such a pair, the specialisations g y and h z
are the q-expansions of classical eigenforms of weight 1; in this case their
associated Galois representations are Artin representations, denoted ρ y and ρz
respectively. By specialising κ E (g, h) to this pair, we obtain a cohomology
class κ E (g y , h z ) ∈ H 1 (Q, V p (E) ⊗ ρ y ⊗ ρz ). Note that this class needs not be
cristalline at p, since it did not arise from a geometric construction, but rather
by deforming p-adically a collection of geometric classes. The goal of [DR2]
is to show that
κ E (g y , h z ) is cristalline at p if and only if L(E, ρ y ⊗ ρz , 1) = 0. (3.79)
The main arithmetical application of (3.79) is the following instance of the
Birch and Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture:
Theorem 3.13. Let E be an elliptic curve over Q and let
ρ1 , ρ2 : G Q −→ GL2 (C)
be two continuous odd Galois representations, attached to weight one modular
forms g and h respectively. Assume det(ρ1 ) · det(ρ2 ) = 1 and there exists σ ∈
G Q for which ρ1 ⊗ ρ2 (σ ) has distinct eigenvalues. If L(E ⊗ ρ1 ⊗ ρ2 , 1) = 0,
then
dimC (hom(ρ1 ⊗ ρ2 , E(Q̄) ⊗ C)) = 0.
Conclusion
The contents of this survey are summarised in the table below, whose rows
correspond to the six Euler systems covered in each section. The first and sec-
ond column list the Euler system and its associated p-adic L-function, while
the third gives the p-adic special value formula relating the two. The last col-
umn indicates the (eventual) application of each Euler system to the Birch
and Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture. In this column, BSDr (E, ρ) refers to the
implication
ords=1 L(E, ρ, s) = r ⇒ dimC homG Q (ρ, E(K ρ ) ⊗ C) = r,
where E is an elliptic curve over Q,
ρ : G Q −→ GLn (C)
is an Artin representation, and r ≥ 0 is an integer. The letter A alludes
to an elliptic curve with complex multiplication, and the letter E to a gen-
eral (modular) elliptic curve over Q. Likewise, the symbol ρψ refers to the
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 95
A. Complex formulae
The authors would be remiss if they failed to mention that the p-adic special
value formulae described in this survey all have complex counterparts:
1.1. Dirichlet’s class number formula relates the complex logarithm of the
absolute value of the circular unit u χ of Section 1.1 to the special value
L(1, χ ), or (equivalently, by the functional equation of L(s, χ )) to the first
derivative L (0, χ ) at s = 0.
1.2. The Kronecker limit formula relates the complex logarithm of the absolute
value of the elliptic unit u χn of Section 1.2 to the special value L(K , χn , 1) or
(equivalently, by the functional equation) to the first derivative L (K , χn , 0).
The Kronecker limit formula can also be recast as a simple relation between
the square of this logarithm and the first derivative at s = 1 of the Rankin
convolution L-series
96 Bertolini, Castella, Darmon, Dasgupta, Prasanna, and Rotger
where θχn is the weight one theta series attached to the character χn . Note that
the two factors on the right-hand side, at s = 1, are interchanged under the
functional equation for L(θχn , s).
1.3. The Gross–Zagier formula of [GZ] relates the Néron–Tate canonical
height of the Heegner point PK , f of Section 1.3 to the first derivative at s = 1
of the Rankin L-series
L( f ⊗ θ K , s). (3.81)
This L-series is obtained from the L-series in (3.80) by replacing the Eisenstein
series E 2,χ by the weight two cusp form f (and χ by the trivial character).
2.1. Beilinson’s formula for K 2 (X 1 (N )) relates the square of the complex reg-
ulator of the Beilinson element {u χ , u χ −1 } of Section 2.1, evaluated at the class
η f , (attached, here as in Section 2.1, to a form f with trivial nebentypus char-
acter) to the first derivative at the central value s = 2 of the triple convolution
L-series
L( f ⊗ g ⊗ E 2,χ , s) = L( f ⊗ g, s)L( f ⊗ g, χ , s − 1)
= L( f ⊗ g, s)L( f¯ ⊗ ḡ, s − 1), (3.83)
(where the last equality follows from the fact that χ is fixed to be the inverse of
the product of the nebentypus characters of f and g). Note that the factors on
the right of equations (3.82) and (3.83), evaluated at s = 2, are interchanged
under the functional equation, up to simple constants and Gamma factors, and
that the L-series on the left admits a simple zero at s = 2.
2.3. The Gross–Kudla–Yuan–Zhang–Zhang formula: As described in [GrKu]
and [YZZ], it expresses the Arakelov height of the ( f, g, h)-isotypic com-
ponent of the Gross–Kudla–Schoen diagonal cycle " ∈ CH2 (X 1 (N )3 )0 of
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 97
Section 2.3 in terms of the first derivative at the central value s = 2 of the
triple convolution L-series
L( f ⊗ g ⊗ h, s). (3.84)
References
[BD1] M. Bertolini, H. Darmon, Kato’s Euler system and rational points on elliptic
curves I: A p-adic Beilinson formula, Israel J. Math., to appear.
[BD2] M. Bertolini, H. Darmon, Kato’s Euler system and rational points on elliptic
curves II: The explicit reciprocity law, in preparation.
[BDP] M. Bertolini, H. Darmon, K. Prasanna, Generalised Heegner cycles and
p-adic Rankin L-series, Duke Math. J. 162, (2013) no. 6, 1033–1148.
[BDR1] M. Bertolini, H. Darmon, V. Rotger, Beilinson-Flach elements and Euler
systems I: syntomic regulators and p-adic Rankin L-series, submitted for
publication.
[BDR2] M. Bertolini, H. Darmon, V. Rotger, Beilinson-Flach elements and Euler sys-
tems II: p-adic families and the Birch and Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture, in
preparation.
p-adic L-functions and Euler systems 99
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
102
Effective local Langlands correspondence 103
but may equally be useful as a road-map for the reader wishing to pursue the
topic further.
Acknowledgement. The exposition has been improved at several points follow-
ing suggestions of an anonymous referee, to whom it is a pleasure to give
thanks.
and which are compactly supported modulo K , then carries a natural action of
G by right translation. The representation of G so obtained is smooth. It is said
to be compactly induced from ρ, and is denoted c-IndG K ρ.
We specialize to the case where G is the group of F-points of some
connected, reductive algebraic group defined over F: we say that G is a con-
nected reductive F-group. Such a group G carries a locally profinite topology,
inherited from F.
1.2. Example
We give the first standard example of the idea of 1.1. It recurs frequently in
later pages, despite being rather atypical.
Let V be an F-vector space of dimension n, A = End F (V ), G = Aut F (V ).
Let L be an o F -lattice in V and set
m = m F (L) = Endo F (L) ∼
= Mn (o F ).
Thus m is a maximal o F -order in A. The ideal pm = p F m is the Jacobson
radical of m. Set
106 Colin J. Bushnell
K = F × Um , 1
Um = 1+pm .
In particular, K is an open subgroup of G, compact modulo the centre F × of
G, and Um 1 is an open normal subgroup of K .
IG (λ) = K ⇐⇒ λ̃ is cuspidal.
2. Simple characters
As before, let V be an F-vector space of finite dimension n, and set A =
End F (V ), G = Aut F (V ). Fundamental to the classification theory is the con-
cept of “simple character in G”. Simple characters are complex and subtle
objects defined explicitly but indirectly. The basic theory is rather technical.
It occupies the first three chapters of [15], and is further developed in [2]. We
want to concentrate on the implications, for the Langlands correspondence,
of certain structural features. We have therefore given the briefest possible
account of the background material, appending an overview in §6.
One can recover the lattice chain L from the hereditary order a = a F (L),
because L is exactly the set of all a-lattices in V . When using this viewpoint,
the period e = e(a) = e F (L) appears as a sort of ramification index,
p F a = pea .
Observe that a is a maximal order if and only if e(a) = 1.
Attached to a hereditary o F -order a in A, we have the unit group Ua = a× .
This is a compact open subgroup of G. It is a maximal compact subgroup if
and only if a is a maximal order. Inside Ua , we have the “standard filtration
subgroups”
Uak = 1 + pka , k 1.
These are again open in G and normal in Ua .
108 Colin J. Bushnell
The effect of (3) is the following. If we have another pair [a, β ] satisfying (1)
and (2), such that β −β ∈ a, then
The formal definition, which is equivalent to (3), is recalled in 6.3 below. The
point needed here is that a simple stratum [a, β] gives rise, in a canonical and
explicit manner, to an open, therefore compact, subgroup H 1 (β, a) of Ua1 . At
this stage, we note only that the group H 1 (β, a) depends on the equivalence
class of [a, β]: if we have another simple stratum [a, β ] such that β ≡ β
(mod a), then H 1 (β , a) = H 1 (β, a).
3. An example
To illuminate the outline of 2.2, 2.3, we give the simplest useful example.
4.1. Intertwining
Let [a, β] be a simple stratum in A = End F (V ). Let E = F[β], let B be the
A-centralizer of E and set b = a ∩ B. Let θ ∈ C(a, β). We attach to θ the
following groups:
Jθ = the G-normalizer of θ ,
Jθ0 = Jθ ∩ Ua ,
Jθ1 = Jθ ∩ Ua1 .
Lemma. Let Kb denote the group of y ∈ B × such that y −1 by = b.
(1) The group Jθ is open and compact modulo centre in G.
(2) The groups Jθ , Jθ0 , Jθ1 depend only on the equivalence class of [a, β], and
satisfy the following relations,
Jθ = Kb Jθ1 ,
Jθ0 = Ub Jθ1 ,
Ub1 = Ub ∩ Jθ1 .
(3) The set IG (θ ), of elements of G which intertwine θ , is given by
IG (θ ) = Jθ1 B × Jθ1 .
Remarks. We will prefer to label groups by θ rather than the attached simple
stratum since, as we shall see in 5.1, the stratum is not a reliable invariant of
Effective local Langlands correspondence 111
the situation. So, from now on, we usually write Hθ1 rather than H 1 (β, a), for
θ ∈ C(a, β). We observe that Jθ0 is the unique maximal compact subgroup of
Jθ and Jθ1 is the pro- p radical of Jθ0 .
[(l+1)/2]
Jθ1 = J 1 (α, a) = Ub1 Ua .
Λ −→ c-IndJGθ Λ
C(a, β) ∩ C(a , β ) = ∅
(1) a = a ,
(2) C(a, β) = C(a, β ),
(3) e(F[β]|F) = e(F[β ]|F) and [F[β] : F] = [F[β ] : F].
The hypotheses of Proposition 1 imply no further relation between the fields
F[β], F[β ]. Indeed, it is easy to find examples where any two fields of
given degree and ramification index can give rise to the same sets of simple
characters.
Effective local Langlands correspondence 113
The second result [15] 3.5.11 of the sequence deals with intertwining of
simple characters attached to the same hereditary order.
5.2. Transfer
In another direction, we may fix the element β and vary the order a. We start
from a finite field extension E = F[β]/F, generated by an element β, of
negative valuation and simple over F, as in 2.2.
We suppose given two finite-dimensional E-vector spaces V1 , V2 and set
Ai = End F (Vi ). Let ai be an E-pure hereditary order in Ai . Thus [ai , β] is a
simple stratum in Ai . In these circumstances, there is a canonical bijection
β ≈ / C(a2 , β).
τa1 ,a2 : C(a1 , β)
β
We refer to τa1 ,a2 as the β-transfer from a1 to a2 . Transfer is natural relative
to the orders ai : in the obvious notation,
β β β
τa1 ,a3 = τa2 ,a3 ◦ τa1 ,a2 .
θ|U 1 = χθ ◦ det B .
b
χτ θ = χθ , θ ∈ C(a1 , β).
5.3. Endo-equivalence
We start with a pair of finite-dimensional F-vector spaces V1 , V2 . We are given
a simple stratum [ai , βi ] in Ai = End F (Vi ), i = 1, 2. A common realization of
114 Colin J. Bushnell
Remark. In the context of part (3) of the proposition, the ramification indices
e(F[βi ]|F) are equal, as are the inertial degrees f (F[βi ]|F). The extensions
F[βi ]/F need not be isomorphic. However, if Ti /F is the maximal tamely
ramified sub-extension of F[βi ]/F, the fields Ti are F-isomorphic [13], 2.4.
j
Indeed, there exists j ∈ Jθ1 such that T2 = T1 . Any two choices of j induce the
−1
same isomorphism x → j x j from T1 to T2 . Thus θ determines the maximal
tamely ramified sub-extension uniquely, up to distinguished isomorphism.
π = π1 π2 · · · πr .
ϑ(π j ) = i K /F ϑ(ρ), 1 j r.
The proof of this theorem is given in [5] but relies heavily on some special
cases in [2]. In both of those papers, we assumed that F had characteristic zero
since, at the time they were written, automorphic induction was known only in
that case. The existence, and relevant properties, of automorphic induction in
positive characteristic are established in [23]. Once that theory became avail-
able, so did the positive characteristic case of the theorem: the proof requires no
modification. We remark also that there is a related result connecting tame lift-
ing with base change, in the sense of [1] and [23], but we will not use that here.
once in the pages to follow. However, we are guided by the desire to use the
Langlands correspondence as a computational tool, and the material here is
essential to any such project. This skeleton should prove adequate for most
purposes, and may also serve as a short introduction for a reader unfamiliar
with these matters.
Let V be a finite-dimensional F-vector space, and set A = End F (V ), G =
Aut F (V ).
6.3. Strata
We need a looser definition of stratum, as in Chapter 1 of [15]. We recall (2.1)
that the Jacobson radical of a hereditary order a is invertible, as two-sided ideal
of a.
A stratum in A is a quadruple [a, l, m, b] as follows. First, a is a hereditary
o F -order in A; we set p = rad a. The parameters l, m are integers such that
l > m. Finally, b ∈ p−l . Strata [a, l, m, bi ], i = 1, 2, are deemed equivalent if
b1 ≡ b2 (mod p−m ). We use the notation
[a, l, m, b1 ] ∼ [a, l, m, b2 ].
A stratum [a, l, m, β] is called pure if F[β] is a field, a is F[β]-pure, and
βa = p−l .
Let [a, l, m, β] be a pure stratum in A, and write E = F[β]. Let B be the
A-centralizer of E, and take b, p, q as in 6.1. Let k be an integer and define
Nk = {x ∈ a : aβ (x) ∈ pk }.
For k sufficiently large, we have Nk ⊂ b+p. Assuming E = F, we define
k0 (β, a) = max {k ∈ Z : Nk ⊂ b+p}.
In the case E = F, it is convenient to set k0 (β, a) = −∞. Otherwise, we have
k0 (β, a) −l.
A simple stratum in A is a pure stratum [a, l, m, β] such that
m < −k0 (β, a).
To describe the dependence of k0 (β, a) on a, we note that the matrix algebra
End F (E) contains a unique E-pure hereditary o F -order a(E): this is defined
j
by the lattice chain {p E : j ∈ Z} in E. Let p(E) = rad a(E), so that βa(E) =
p(E)υ , where υ = υ E (β). We set
k F (β) = k0 (β, a(E)).
We expand a comment made in 2.2.
Effective local Langlands correspondence 119
(2) The element β is minimal over F if and only if k0 (β, a) = −l, that is, if
and only if k F (β) = υ F[β] (β). In particular, a pure stratum [a, l, l−1, β]
is simple if and only if β is minimal over F.
(3) Moreover,
−m if α ∈
/ F[γ ],
k0 (β, a) =
k0 (γ , a) otherwise.
Remark. In the context of Theorem 1, the field F[γ ] need not be
F-isomorphic to a subfield of F[β].
All simple strata arise from the construction in Theorem 1. Indeed, let
[a, l, m, β] be a simple stratum in A and set r = −k0 (β, a). We assume β ∈ / F,
so r is an integer satisfying m < r l. There is nothing to do if r = l, since β
is then minimal over F. We therefore assume the contrary.
This sort of technique also allows one to compare simple strata, step by step.
These groups depend only on the equivalence class of the stratum [a, l, 0, β].
Next, we choose a smooth character ψ of F of level one. For a ∈ A,
we denote by ψa the function x → ψ(tr A (a(x−1))) on A. We define a set
C(a, β, ψ) of characters of H 1 (β, a), following the preceding construction.
Suppose first that β is minimal over F. As in §3, a character θ lies in C(a, β, ψ)
if and only if θ |U 1 factors through det B and
b
[l/2]+1
θ (y) = ψβ (y), y ∈ Ua .
Effective local Langlands correspondence 121
θ K := θ | H 1 (β,c)
lies in C(c, β, ψ K ).
(2) There exists ρ ∈ W E such that ρ|P ∼ α. If ρ is any other such repre-
F =
sentation, there is a unique tamely ramified character ψ of W E such that
ρ ∼
= ρ ⊗ ψ.
(3) Taking ρ as in (2), let τ ∈ Gs (E; 1 F ). The representation
Σρ (τ ) = Ind E/F ρ ⊗ τ
is irreducible, and lies in Gs (F; α). The map
Σρ : Gs (E; 1 F ) −→ Gs (F; α)
is a bijection.
All assertions here are straightforward, but a complete proof may be found
in §1 of [13].
III. Connections
For an integer n 1, let An (F) denote the set of equivalence classes of irre-
ducible, smooth, cuspidal representations of GLn (F). It will also be convenient
to have the notation
+
,F =
GL An (F).
n1
F → GL
Thus the Langlands correspondence σ → Lσ is a bijection W , F.
If π ∈ An (F), then π contains a unique G-conjugacy class of simple
characters in G = GLn (F) (4.3). These simple characters all lie in the
same endo-equivalence class, which we have denoted ϑ(π ). Thus we have
a canonical surjective map
, F −→ E(F).
ϑ : GL
F
W
L / GL
,F
r F1 ϑ
W F \PF / E(F)
F
i K /F
W F \PF / E(F)
F
commutes.
Part (1) is proved in [5] §8, under the restriction that F has characteristic
zero. As remarked in 5.5, it holds equally, with the same proof, in positive
characteristic. Part (2) is 6.2 of [13] (and follows easily from the Automorphic
Induction Theorem of 5.5).
Let Θ ∈ E(F) and let s 1 be a positive integer. We define As (F; Θ) to
be the set of π ∈ As deg Θ (F) such that ϑ(π ) = Θ. As in [13], we have the
following corollary.
F and set E = Z F (α), Θ = F (α).
Tame Parameter Theorem. Let α ∈ P
(1) We have
deg Θ = [E:F] dim α.
(2) If Θ is the endo-equivalence class of θ ∈ C(a, β), for a simple stratum
[a, β] in some matrix algebra, then E is F-isomorphic to the maximal
tamely ramified sub-extension T /F of F[β]/F.
(3) The Langlands correspondence induces a bijection
Gs (F; α) −→ As (F; Θ),
for all s 1.
something of the nature of F (α) from Mœglin’s treatment [28] of the Lang-
lands correspondence in dimension p, p 5. For detailed treatment of the
case p = 2, see [26] or [9], for p = 3 see [19]. Otherwise, we have virtually
no systematic information concerning the map F .
9. Main theorem
We return to the context of 4.3, to describe more fully the class of extended
maximal types attached to an m-simple character in a group GLn (F).
9.1. Notation
We establish notation for the rest of the section. Let θ be a non-trivial m-simple
character in G = GLn (F). In particular, θ ∈ C(a, β, ψ), for some simple
stratum [a, β] in A = Mn (F) and a smooth character ψ of F of level one. We
now set P = F[β], we let B be the A-centralizer of P and put b = a ∩ B.
Attached to θ are the groups Jθ , Jθ0 and Jθ1 of 4.1. Since θ is m-simple, we
have Jθ = P × Jθ0 = P × Ub Jθ1 and Jθ1 ∩ P × Ub = Ub1 , so the inclusion of Ub in
Effective local Langlands correspondence 127
As the notation indicates, the map Πκ does not depend on the choice of param-
eter field P/T : this follows easily from the remark following the definition of
8.3. Also, the underlying simple character θ determines the tame parameter
field T /F uniquely up to a distinguished isomorphism so Πκ is essentially
independent of the choice of T .
Effective local Langlands correspondence 129
Let E = Z F (α), so that deg Θ = [E:F] dim α, by the Tame Parameter The-
orem. Set n = s deg Θ, and let θ be an m-simple character in G = GLn (F)
of endo-equivalence class Θ: this determines θ uniquely, up to G-conjugation.
We choose a simple stratum [a, β] in Mn (F) such that θ ∈ C(a, β), and use
the notation set up in 9.1. By the Tame Parameter Theorem again, the field E
is F-isomorphic to the maximal tamely ramified sub-extension T /F of P/F .
One needs to specify an F-isomorphism here. The simple character θ gives
rise to a simple character θT over T , as in 6.6. Let ΘT ∈ E(T ) be the endo-
equivalence class of θT . We choose the isomorphism E → T to carry E (α)
to ΘT . This determines it uniquely. We henceforward use this isomorphism to
identify E with T .
Let ρ ∈ G1 (E; α): thus ρ ∈ W E and ρ|P ∼ α. Using the proposition
F =
of 7.1, any σ ∈ Gs (F; α) is of the form Σρ (τ ), for a uniquely determined
representation τ ∈ Gs (E; 1 E ). In particular, Lτ ∈ As (E; 0 E ).
Main Theorem. Let ρ ∈ G1 (E; α). There exists a unique κ = κρ ∈ H(θ )
such that
L
Σρ (τ ) = Πκ ( Lτ ), τ ∈ Gs (E; 1 E ).
The map
G1 (E; α) −→ H(θ ),
ρ −→ κρ
is an isomorphism of X 1 (E)-spaces.
This summarizes the main results of [13], especially 7.3 and 7.6.
9.5. Comments
9.5.1.
In the special case E = F, s = 1, the theorem says essentially nothing. Each of
the sets G1 (F; α), A1 (F; Θ) is a principal homogeneous space over the abelian
group X 1 (F) of tamely ramified characters of F × . The Langlands correspon-
dence provides an X 1 (F)-bijection G1 (F; α) → A1 (F; Θ). Any X 1 (F)-map
G1 (F; α) → A1 (F; Θ) is therefore bijective, and differs from the Langlands
correspondence by a constant X 1 (F)-translation.
130 Colin J. Bushnell
9.5.2.
We return to the general case. Let E s /E be unramified of degree s and set
Δ = Gal(E s /E). Write ρs = ρ|W Es and πs = Lρs . In particular, ρs
is a Δ-fixed point of G1 (E s ; α) and likewise πs ∈ A1 (E s ; Θs )Δ , where
Θs = E s (α). The representation πs contains an m-simple character θs of
endo-equivalence class Θs , lifting an m-simple character θ in GLn (F) of endo-
equivalence class Θ. The representation πs contains an extended maximal
simple type κ(ρs ) ∈ T (θs ) = H(θs ) which is fixed by Δ.
The first step of the proof uses an explicit construction, based on the
Glauberman correspondence [16] from the representation theory of finite
groups, to produce a canonical map i E s /F : H(θs )Δ → H(θ ). The representa-
tion κ(ρ) = i Es /F κ(ρs ) is not the representation κρ required by the theorem.
However, for a simple reason as in 9.5.1, there exists μρ ∈ X 1 (E s )Δ such that
κρ = κ(μρ ⊗ ρ),
for all ρ ∈ G1 (E; α). The main labour of the proof is in showing that μρ
is independent of ρ, and so depends only on s, α and the base field F. We
therefore denote it μ = μs,α
F .
9.5.3.
In the essentially tame case, where dim α = 1, the character μs,α F is worked
out fully in [7], [8] and [10]. In the general case dim α 1, it is constructed as
a product following a certain structure tower for the field extension E s /F:
E s ⊃ K 0 ⊃ K 1 ⊃ · · · ⊃ K r ⊃ F.
Here, K r /F is unramified and E s /K r is totally tamely ramified. Each
K i /K i+1 , 0 i r −1, is cyclic of prime degree, while E s has trivial
K 0 -automorphism group. This yields a decomposition
/K r
= μαEs /K 0 · μαK 0 /K 1 · . . . · μα r −1 · μαK r /F .
K
μs,α
F
K /F
The unramified contribution μα r can be worked out completely, in terms
of simple combinatorial invariants. It has order 2 but may be ramified [13]
E /K
10.7. At the other end, μα s 0 is somewhat mysterious: it is unramified of
order dividing 2[E s :K 0 ] dim α. The remaining factors are given by various
explicit formulae involving transfer factors and certain constants derived from
automorphic induction.
9.5.4.
The proof of the Main Theorem exposes a structure of some independent inter-
est. If α ∈ PF and E = Z F (α), the set Gs (F; α) carries a natural action
Effective local Langlands correspondence 131
of the group X 1 (E). Let σ ∈ Gs (F; α), and write σ = Σρ (τ ), for some
ρ ∈ G1 (E; α), τ ∈ Gs (E; 1 F ). We set
χ (α σ = Σρ (χ ⊗ τ ), χ ∈ X 1 (E).
On the other side, let θ be an m-simple character in G = GLn (F), say θ ∈
C(a, β). Set P = F[β], s = n/[P:F] and let Θ be the endo-equivalence
class of θ. Let T /F be the maximal tamely ramified sub-extension of P/F.
Let π ∈ As (F; Θ). Thus π = Πκ (ξ ), for κ ∈ H(θ ) and ξ ∈ As (T ; 0T ). For
χ ∈ X 1 (T ), we set
χ (T π = Πκ (χ ξ ).
In the case Θ = F (α), the F-isomorphism E ∼
= T chosen in 9.4 yields
L
(χ (α σ ) = χ ( E Lσ, χ ∈ X 1 (E), σ ∈ Gs (F; α).
This (T -action may be defined more transparently via extended maximal
simple types, in the manner of 9.2.
9.5.5.
The version of the Langlands correspondence given by the Main Theorem
is well-adapted to describing congruence behaviour, modulo a prime number
l = p. See [14] for a simple treatment of this topic.
ε(χ π1 × π2 , s, ψ) = ε(π1 × χ π2 , s, ψ)
= χ (- )a(π1 ×π2 )+n 1 n 2 c(ψ) ε(π1 × π2 , s, ψ),
References
[1] J. Arthur and L. Clozel, Simple algebras, base change, and the advanced theory of
the trace formula, Annals of Math. Studies, vol. 120, Princeton University Press,
1989.
Effective local Langlands correspondence 133
[2] C.J. Bushnell and G. Henniart, Local tame lifting for GL(n) I: simple characters,
Publ. Math. IHES 83 (1996), 105–233.
[3] ———, Local Rankin-Selberg convolution for G L(n): divisibility of the conduc-
tor, Math. Ann. 321 (2001), 455–461.
[4] ———, On certain dyadic representations. Appendix to H. Kim and F. Shahidi,
Functorial products for G L(2) × G L(3) and functorial symmetric cube for
G L(2), Annals of Math. (2) 155 (2002), 883–893.
[5] ———, Local tame lifting for G L(n) IV: simple characters and base change,
Proc. London Math. Soc. 87 (2003), 337–362.
[6] ———, Local tame lifting for G L(n) III: explicit base change and Jacquet-
Langlands correspondence, J. reine angew. Math. 508 (2005), 39–100.
[7] ———, The essentially tame local Langlands correspondence, I J. Amer. Math.
Soc. 18 (2005), 685–710.
[8] ———, The essentially tame local Langlands correspondence, II: totally ramified
representations, Compositio Mathematica 141 (2005), 979–1011.
[9] ———, The local Langlands Conjecture for G L(2) Grundlehren der mathema-
tischen Wissenschaften, vol. 335, Springer, 2006.
[10] ———, The essentially tame local Langlands correspondence, III: the general
case, Proc. London Math. Soc. (3) 101 (2010), 497–553.
[11] ———, The essentially tame local Jacquet-Langlands correspondence, Pure App.
Math. Quarterly 7 (2011), 469–538.
[12] ———, Explicit functorial correspondences for level zero representations of
p-adic linear groups, J. Number Theory 131 (2011), 309–331.
[13] ———, To an effective local Langlands correspondence, Memoirs Amer. Math.
Soc., to appear. arXiv:1103.5316.
[14] ———, Modular local Langlands correspondence for GLn , Int. Math. Res. Not.
(2013), doi: 10.1093/imrn/rnt063.
[15] C.J. Bushnell and P.C. Kutzko, The admissible dual of G L(N ) via compact open
subgroups, Annals of Math. Studies, vol. 129, Princeton University Press, 1993.
[16] G. Glauberman, Correspondences of characters for relatively prime operator
groups, Canadian J. Math. 20 (1968), 1465–1488.
[17] J.A. Green, The characters of the finite general linear groups, Trans. Amer. Math.
Soc. 80 (1955), 402–447.
[18] M. Harris and R. Taylor, On the geometry and cohomology of some simple
Shimura varieties, Annals of Math. Studies, vol. 151, Princeton University Press,
2001.
[19] G. Henniart, La conjecture locale de Langlands pour GL(3), Mém. Soc. Math.
France, nouvelle série 11/12 (1984).
[20] ———, Caractérisation de la correspondance de Langlands locale par les facteurs
ε de paires, Invent. Math. 113 (1993), 339–356.
[21] ———, Une preuve simple des conjectures locales de Langlands pour GLn sur
un corps p-adique, Invent. Math. 139 (2000), 439–455.
[22] G. Henniart and R. Herb, Automorphic induction for G L(n) (over local non-
archimedean fields), Duke Math. J. 78 (1995), 131–192.
[23] G. Henniart and B. Lemaire, Changement de base et induction automorphe pour
GLn en caractéristique non nulle, Mém. Soc. Math. France 108 (2010).
134 Colin J. Bushnell
Abstract
We state conjectures on the relationships between automorphic representations
and Galois representations, and give evidence for them.
Contents
1 Introduction page 135
2 L-groups and local definitions 139
3 Global definitions, and the first conjectures 153
4 The case of tori 161
5 Twisting and Gross’ η 167
6 Functoriality 176
7 Reality checks 178
8 Relationship with theorems/conjectures in the literature 181
References 185
1. Introduction
1.1.
Given an algebraic Hecke character for a number field F, a classical construc-
tion of Weil produces a compatible system of 1-dimensional !-adic representa-
tions of Gal(F/F). In the late 1950s, Taniyama’s work [Tan57] on L-functions
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
135
136 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
The goal of this paper is to generalise (most of) the statement of Clozel’s
conjecture to the case where GLn is replaced by an arbitrary connected reduc-
tive group G. Let us explain the first stumbling block in this programme. The
naive conjecture would be of the following form: if an automorphic repre-
sentation π for G is algebraic (in some reasonable sense) then there should
be a Galois representation into the Q p -points of the L-group of G, associ-
ated to π. But if one looks, for example, at Proposition 3.4.4 of [CHT08],
one sees that they can associate p-adic Galois representations to certain auto-
morphic representations on certain compact unitary groups, but that the Galois
representations are taking values in a group Gn which one can check is not
the L-group of the unitary group in question (for dimension reasons, for
example). In fact there are even easier examples of this phenomenon: if π
is the automorphic representation for GL2 /Q attached to an elliptic curve
over the rationals, then (if one uses the standard normalisation for π ) one
sees that π has trivial central character and hence descends to an automor-
phic representation for PGL2 /Q which one would surely hope to be algebraic
(because it is cohomological). However, the L-group of PGL2 /Q is SL2 and
there is no way of twisting the Galois representation afforded by the p-adic
Tate module of the curve so that it lands into SL2 (Q! ), because the cyclo-
tomic character has no square root (consider complex conjugation). On the
other hand, there do exist automorphic representation for PGL2 /Q which have
associated Galois representations into SL2 (Q! ); for example one can eas-
ily build them from automorphic representations on GL2 /Q constructed via
the Langlands–Tunnell theorem applied to a continuous even irreducible 2-
dimensional representation of Gal(Q/Q) into SL2 (C) with solvable image.
What is going on?
Our proposed solution is the following. For a general connected reductive
group G, we believe that there are two reasonable notions of “algebraic”.
For GLn these notions differ by a twist (and this explains why this twist
appears in Clozel’s work). For some groups the notions coincide. But for
some others – for example PGL2 – the notions are disjoint. The two defini-
tions “differ by half the sum of the positive roots”. We call the two notions
C-algebraic and L-algebraic. It turns out that cohomological automorphic rep-
resentations are C-algebraic (hence the C), and that given an L-algebraic
automorphic representation one might expect an associated Galois representa-
tion into the L-group (hence the L). Clozel twists C-algebraic representations
into L-algebraic ones in his paper, and hence conjectures that there should
be Galois representations attached to C-algebraic representations for GLn ,
but this trick is not possible in general. In this chapter we explicitly conjec-
ture the existence of p-adic Galois representations associated to L-algebraic
138 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
1.2. Acknowledgements
We would like to thank Jeff Adams, James Arthur, Frank Calegari, Brian Con-
rad, Matthew Emerton, Wee Teck Gan, Dick Gross, Florian Herzig, Robert
Langlands, David Loeffler, Ambrus Pál, Richard Taylor and David Vogan for
helpful discussions relating to this work. Particular thanks go to Gross, for giv-
ing us a copy of Deligne’s 2007 letter to Serre and urging us to read it, and to
Adams and Vogan for dealing with several questions of ours involving local
Langlands at infinity which were apparently “known to the experts” but which
we could not extract from the literature ourselves.
The first author was supported by an EPSRC Advanced Research Fellow-
ship, and the second author would like to acknowledge the support of the
National Science Foundation (award number DMS-0841491). He would also
like to thank the mathematics department of Northwestern University for its
hospitality in the early stages of this project.
are two (typically distinct) notions of what it means to be “defined over E”,
for E a subfield of C. Indeed, if π is a smooth admissible irreducible repre-
sentation of G(k) with a K -fixed vector, then π K is a 1-dimensional complex
vector space on which HC (G(k), K ) acts, and this action induces maps
HQ (G(k), K ) → C
and
Q[X ∗ (Td )]Wd → C.
Definition 5.2. Let π be smooth, irreducible and admissible, with a K -fixed
vector. Let E be a subfield of C.
(i) We say that π is defined over E if the induced map HQ (G(k), K ) → C
has image lying in E.
(ii) We say that the Satake parameter of π is defined over E if the induced
map Q[X ∗ (Td )]Wd → C has image lying in E.
If half the sum of the positive roots of G is in the lattice X ∗ (T ), then these
notions coincide. However there is no reason for them to coincide in general
and we shall shortly see examples for GL2 (Q p ) where they do not.
Note also that it is not immediately clear that these notions are indepen-
dent of the choice of K : perhaps there is some π with a K -fixed vector and
a K -fixed vector for two non-conjugate hyperspecial maximal compacts (for
example, the trivial 1-dimensional representation of SL2 (Q p ) has this prop-
erty), and which is defined over E (or has Satake parameter defined over E)
for one choice but not for the other. The reader should bear in mind that for
the time being these notions depend on the choice of K , although we will soon
see (in Corollary 5.4 and Lemma 5.5) that they are in fact independent of this
choice.
We now discuss some other natural notions of being “defined over E” for
E a subfield of C, and relate them to the notions above. So let E be a subfield
of C and let π be a smooth irreducible admissible complex representation of
G(k) with a K -fixed vector, for our fixed choice of K . Let V be the underlying
vector space for π .
Lemma 5.3. The following are equivalent:
(i) The representation π is defined over E.
(ii) There is an E-subspace V0 of V which is G(k)-stable and such that V0 ⊗ E
C = V.
(iii) For any (possibly discontinuous) field automorphism σ of C which fixes
E pointwise, we have π ∼= π σ = π ⊗C,σ C as C-representations.
Automorphic Galois representations 145
Lemma 5.6. Let G be the group GLn /k and let π be an unramified rep-
resentation of G(k). Let E be a subfield of C. Then the following are
equivalent:
Proof. The statement that the Satake parameter is defined over E is precisely
the statement that the induced map Q[X ∗ (T )]W → C takes values in E, which
is the statement that the characteristic polynomial of an element of Sπ has
coefficients in E. Hence (i) and (ii) are equivalent. Furthermore, (ii) is equiv-
alent to (iii) because given a monic polynomial with coefficients in E it is
easy to construct a semisimple matrix with this polynomial as its characteristic
polynomial.
Let k be either the real numbers or an algebraic closure of the real num-
bers. Let G be a connected reductive group over k. Fix an algebraic closure
k of k and let T ⊆ B be a maximal torus and a Borel subgroup of G k . If π
is an irreducible admissible complex representation of G(k) then Langlands
associates to π , in a completely canonical way, a G(C)-conjugacy class of
admissible homomorphisms r = rπ from the Weil group Wk = Wk/k of
k to L G(C). For simplicity let us choose a maximal torus T in G C ; this is
just for notational convenience. The group Wk contains a finite index sub-
× ×
group canonically isomorphic to k ; let us assume that r (k ) ⊆ T (C)
(which can always be arranged, possibly after conjugating r by an element
of G(C)). If σ and τ denote the two R-isomorphisms k → C then one
×
checks easily that for z ∈ k we have r (z) = σ (z)λσ τ (z)λτ for λσ , λτ ∈
) ⊗ C such that λσ − λτ ∈ X ∗ (T
X ∗ (T ). Note that because we may not
want to fix a preferred choice of isomorphism k = C, we might sometimes
“have no preference between λσ and λτ ”; this makes our presentation diverge
slightly from other standard references, where typically one isomorphism is
preferred.
Because T (C) is usually not its own normaliser in G(C),
there is usually
×
more than one way of conjugating r (k ) into T (C), with the consequence that
)⊗C)2 is not a well-defined invariant of rπ ; it is only
the pair (λσ , λτ ) ∈ (X ∗ (T
well-defined up to the (diagonal) action of the Weyl group W = W (G, T ) on
)⊗C)2 . For notational convenience however we will continue to refer to
(X ∗ (T
the elements λσ and λτ of X ∗ (T)⊗C and will check that none of our important
later definitions depend on the choice we have made. If k = R then recall from
the construction of the L-group that there is an action of k on X ∗ (T )⊗ C, and
the non-trivial element of this group sends the W -orbit of λσ to the W -orbit of
λτ . If k is isomorphic to C then λσ and λτ are in general unrelated, subject to
their difference being in X ∗ (T ).
The Weyl group orbit of (λσ , λτ ) in (X ∗ (T ) ⊗ C)2 is naturally an invariant
attached to the Weil group representation rπ rather than to π itself, but we can
access a large part of it (however, not quite all of it) more intrinsically from π
using the Harish-Chandra isomorphism. We explain the story when k = R; the
analogous questions in the case k ∼ = C can then be resolved by restriction of
scalars.
So, for this paragraph only, we assume k = R. If we regard G(k) as a
real Lie group with Lie algebra g, then our maximal torus T of G k gives rise
to a Cartan subalgebra h of g ⊗R k. If we now break the symmetry and use
σ to identify k with C, we can interpret the Lie algebra of T ×k,σ C as a
complex Cartan subalgebra hC C
σ of the complex Lie algebra g := g ⊗R C.
C
We have a canonical isomorphism hσ = X ∗ (T ) ⊗Z C (this isomorphism
Automorphic Galois representations 149
These conjectures are seemingly completely out of reach. The general ideas
behind them (although perhaps not the precise definitions we have given) seem
to be part of the folklore nowadays, although it is worth pointing out that as
far as we know the first person to raise such conjectures explicitly was Clozel
in [Clo90] in the case G = GLn .
For the group GL1 over a number field both of the conjectures are true;
indeed in this case both conjectures say the same thing, the “algebraic implies
arithmetic” direction being relatively standard, and the “arithmetic implies
Automorphic Galois representations 155
Remark 5.18. The recipe for the Hodge–Tate cocharacter in the conjectures
above is as follows. Say j : F → Q is an embedding of fields. We have
Automorphic Galois representations 157
PGL2 /Q attempted to illustrate, one does not always have this luxury of being
able to pass easily between L-algebraic and C-algebraic representations for a
given group G. Furthermore a lot of naturally occurring representations are
C-algebraic: for example any cohomological automorphic representation will
always be C-algebraic (see Lemma 5.52 below) and, as the case of PGL2 /Q
illustrated, there may be natural candidates for Galois representations asso-
ciated to these automorphic representations, but they may not take values in
the L-group of G! In fact, essentially all known examples of Galois repre-
sentations attached to automorphic representations ultimately come from the
cohomology of Shimura varieties (although in some cases the constructions
also use congruence arguments), and this cohomology is naturally decomposed
in terms of cohomological automorphic representations. Much of the rest of
this chapter is devoted to examining the relationship between C-algebraic and
L-algebraic in greater detail, and defining a “C-group”, which should conjec-
turally receive the Galois representations attached to C-algebraic automorphic
representations.
Now let T denote a torus over a local field k, and assume T splits over an
unramified extension of k. The topological group T (k) has a unique maximal
compact subgroup U . Let χ be a continuous group homomorphism T (k) →
C× with U in its kernel. Note that U is hyperspecial and hence χ is unramified.
Proof. The Satake isomorphism in this situation is simply the identity isomor-
phism C[T (k)/U ] = C[T (k)/U ], which induces the identity isomorphism
Q[T (k)/U ] = Q[T (k)/U ], so (i) and (ii) are equivalent. The equivalence
of (i) and (iii) follows from the statement that χ : T (k)/U → C× is E × -
valued if and only if the induced ring homomorphism Q[T (k)/U ] → C is
E-valued.
σ
G(F) → C× which is the product of maps φσ : G(F) → G σ (C) → C∗
given by composing an algebraic character with an embedding σ : F → C.
Hence it suffices to prove that φ(G(F)) is contained within a number field
for such a φ. However both T and Gm are defined over F, so the character
descends to some number field L, which we may assume splits T and contains
the images of all embeddings F → C. But then φ(F) ⊂ φ(L) ⊂ L × , as
required.
Theorem 5.29. The notions of arithmetic and algebraic coincide for automor-
phic representations of tori over number fields.
Proof. Let G/F be a torus over a number field, and let π be an automorphic
representation of G. By Corollary 5.26 we know that if π is arithmetic then π is
algebraic, so we only have to prove the converse. We will make repeated use of
the trivial observation (already used above) that if X is a finite index subgroup
of an abelian group Y , then the image of a character of Y is contained in a
number field if and only if the image of its restriction to X is contained in a
(possibly smaller) number field.
Let π = ⊗v πv be algebraic. If K is a finite Galois extension of F splitting G
then BC K /F (π ) is algebraic by Lemma 5.21 and hence arithmetic by Theorem
5.25. Hence there is a number field E and some finite set S K of places of K ,
containing all the infinite places, such that for w ∈ S K , BC(π )w is defined
over E, and hence BC(π )w has image in E × . By increasing S K if necessary,
we can assume that SK is precisely the set of places of K lying above a finite
set S of places of F.
Let N : G(A K ) → G(A F ) denote the norm map. Standard results from
global class field theory (see for example p. 244 of [Lan97] for the crucial
argument) imply that G(F)N (G(A K )) is a closed and open subgroup of finite
index in G(A F ). Hence if A SF denotes the restricted product of the completions
of F at places not in S, and A SKK denotes the analogous product for K , then
G(F)N (G(A SKK )) has finite index in G(A SF ). Let π S : G(A SF ) → C× denote
the restriction of π to G(A SF ). Then π = π S . v∈S,v∞ πv .π∞ . We know that
π is trivial on G(F) (by definition) and that π∞ sends G(F) to a number field
(by Corollary 5.28). We also know that πv (G(Fv )) (and thus πv (G(F)) is con-
tained within a number field for each finite place v ∈ S (because BC K /F (π )
is arithmetic, we know that πv (N (K w )) is contained in a number field, where
w|v is a place of K , and N (K w ) has finite index in Fv ). Hence π S (G(F)) is
contained within a number field. Then since G(F)N (G(A SKK )) has finite index
in G(A SF ), we deduce that π(G(A SF )) is contained within a number field, and
hence π is arithmetic, as required.
Automorphic Galois representations 165
×
is a continuous group homomorphism G(F p ) → Q p and can also be regarded
×
as a continuous group homomorphism G(A F ) → Q p , trivial at all places
other than those above p. The crucial point, which is easy to check, is that the
×
product π p := π alg λ p is a continuous group homomorphism G(A F ) → Q p
which is trivial on G(F).
Now, in Theorem 2(b) of [Lan97], Langlands proves that there is a nat-
ural surjection with finite kernel from the set of G(C)-conjugacy classes of
continuous homomorphisms from the Weil group W F to L G(C) to the set
of continuous homomorphisms from G(F)\G(A F ) to C× (that is, the set of
automorphic representations of G/F), compatible with the local Langlands
166 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
rπ : W F → L G(Q p ),
group in the based root datum for G, with its Galois action. Let us stress that
we always equip X ∗ with the Galois action coming from the construction used
to define the L-group (which might well not be the same as the “usual” Galois
action on X ∗ (T ) induced by the Galois action on T (F), if T is a maximal torus
in G which happens to be defined over F).
Definition 5.34. We say that an element θ ∈ X ∗ is a twisting element if θ is
Gal(F/F)-stable and θ, α ∨ = 1 ∈ Z for all simple coroots α ∨ .
For some groups G there are no twisting elements; for example, if G =
PGL2 . On the other hand, if G is semi-simple and simply-connected then half
the sum of the positive roots is a twisting element. Another case where twisting
elements exist are groups G that are split and have simply-connected derived
subgroup, for example G = GLn , although in this case half the sum of the
positive roots might not be in X ∗ .
If Q is the quotient of G by its derived subgroup, then X ∗ (Q) ⊆ X ∗ and the
arguments in section II.1.18 of [Jan03] show that X ∗ (Q) = (X ∗ )W , where W
is the Weyl group of G F . Furthermore, X ∗ (Q) is Gal(F/F)-stable, and the
induced action of Gal(F/F) on X ∗ (Q) is precisely the usual action, induced
by the Galois action on Q(F).
Now let δ denote half the sum of the positive roots of G. If δ ∈ X ∗ then δ
is a twisting element; but in general we only have δ ∈ 12 X ∗ . Let S denote the
maximal split torus quotient of G, so that
X ∗ (S ) = (X ∗ )W,Gal(F/F) .
Then if θ is a twisting element, we see that
1 ∗
θ −δ ∈ X (S ).
2
Thus we have a character | · |θ−δ of G(F)\G(A F ), defined as the composite
√
|·| x→ x
G(A F ) / S (A F )2(θ−δ) / A× / R>0 / R>0
F
The main motivation behind the notion of twisting elements is the following
two propositions.
Proposition 5.35. If θ is a twisting element, then an automorphic representa-
tion π is C-algebraic if and only if π ⊗ | · |θ −δ is L-algebraic.
Proof. This is a consequence of condition 10.3(2) of [Bor79], although for-
mally one has to “reverse-engineer” the construction of (using the notation of
§10.2 of [Bor79]) α → πα . We sketch the argument using the notation there.
The question is local at each infinite place, so let k denote a completion of F
170 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
Proof. Again this is a local issue: by Definitions 5.12 and 5.13 it suffices to
check that if k (a completion of F) is a non-archimedean local field, if χ
denotes the restriction of | · |θ −δ to G(k) and if π is an unramified repre-
sentation of G(k), then π is defined over a subfield E of C iff π ⊗ χ has
Satake parameter defined over the same subfield E. This is relatively easy to
check: we sketch the details (using the notation of section 2.2). Let T be a
maximal torus of G/k, with maximal compact subgroup o T . Then χ induces
an automorphism i of HC (T (k), o T ) sending [o T t o T ] to χ (t)[o T t o T ], and i
commutes with the action of the Weyl group Wd and hence induces an auto-
morphism i of the Wd -invariants of this complex Hecke algebra. If m π is the
complex character of H (T (k), o T )Wd associated to π and m π⊗χ is the char-
acter associated to π ⊗ χ then one checks easily that m π⊗χ = m π ◦ i. The
other observation we need is that if K is a hyperspecial maximal compact sub-
group of G(k) and if S denotes the Satake isomorphism S : HC (G(k), K ) →
HC (T (k), o T )Wd then i ◦ S maps HQ (G(k), K ) into HQ (T (k), o T ) (this fol-
lows immediately from formula (19) of section 4.2 of [Car79]), and hence into
HQ (T (k), o T )Wd , and an injection between Q-vector spaces which becomes
an isomorphism after tensoring with C must itself be an isomorphism. Hence
i ◦ S : HQ (G(k), K ) ∼ = HQ (T (k), o T )Wd and now composing with m π the
result follows easily.
Thus for groups with a twisting element, our L-notions and C-notions can
be twisted into each other.
Automorphic Galois representations 171
→G →1
1 → Gm → G
Proof. (a) Let G ad denote the quotient of G by its centre and let G sc denote the
simply-connected cover of G ad . Over F we can choose compatible (unnamed)
Borels and tori T sc and T ad in G sc and G ad , and hence define the notion of a
positive root in X ∗ (T sc ) and X ∗ (T ad ).
Now G sc is simply-connected, and hence half the sum of the positive
roots for G sc is a character η of T sc and hence induces a character γ of
Z := ker(G sc → G ad ). This character γ is independent of the notion of posi-
tivity because all Borels in G sc are conjugate. It takes values in μ2 because η2 ,
F
the sum of the positive roots, is a character of T ad and is hence trivial on Z .
Furthermore γ is independent of the choice of T sc , and defined over F.
Pushing the diagram
0 → Z → G sc → G ad → 0
0 → Gm → G 1 → G ad → 0
172 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
The group G is the extension we seek. One can define it “all in one go” as a
subquotient of G × G sc × Gm : it is the elements (g, h, k) such that the images
of g and h in G ad are equal, modulo the image of the finite group Z under the
map sending z to (1, z, γ (z)).
If T 1 and T are maximal tori in G 1 and G
then the character groups of these
tori fit into the following Galois-equivariant commutative diagram
0 / X ∗ (T ad ) / X ∗ (T sc ) / X ∗ (Z ) /0
O O
γ∗
0 / X ∗ (T ad ) / X ∗ (T 1 ) /Z /0
0 / X ∗ (T ) / X ∗ (T) /Z /0
fact that η pairs to one with each simple coroot, and it follows immediately
that θ 1 pairs to one with each simple coroot. Furthermore, η is a Galois-stable
element of X ∗ (T sc ), and Galois acts trivially on Z, from which one can deduce
that Galois acts trivially on θ , and so θ is indeed a twisting element.
(b) Recall that we have a short exact sequence
) → Z → 0.
0 → X ∗ (T ) → X ∗ (T
We will
Definition 5.38. The C-group of G is defined to be the L-group of G.
C
denote this group by G.
The C-group is “as functorial as the L-group is”, and naturally receives the
Galois representations conjecturally (and in some cases provably) attached to
C-algebraic automorphic representations for G. One can think of the C-group
as doing, in a canonical way, the job of unravelling all the square roots that
appear in the Satake isomorphism normalised a la Langlands when applied to
a cohomological representation (for we shall see later on in Lemma 5.52 that
cohomological representations are C-algebraic). Note that the dimension of the
C-group is one more than the dimension of the L-group, but this extra degree
of freedom is cancelled out by the fact that the inclusion Gm → G gives rise
to a map d : G → Gm and we will see later on that our conjectures imply
C
of G,
thought of as a cocharacter of a maximal torus T that is, a map Gm → T
.
Set e = χ (−1).
and is independent
Proposition 5.39. The element e is a central element of G
of all choices. There is a canonical surjection
G
× Gm → G
with kernel central and of order 2, generated by (e, −1). This surjection is
equivariant for the action of Galois used to define the L-groups of G and G.
Proof. We have a canonical map c : G → G; let us beef this up to an isogeny
G → G × Gm with kernel of order 2. To do this we need to construct an
appropriate map ξ : G → Gm , which we do thus: recall that the intermediate
group G 1 used in the construction of G was a push-out of G sc × Gm along Z ;
we define a map G × Gm → Gm by sending (g, λ) to λ2 ; the image of Z
sc
in Gm has order at most 2, and thus this induces a map G 1 → Gm and hence
a map ξ : G → Gm . The restriction of ξ to the subgroup Gm of G is the map
→ G × Gm has
λ → λ2 , and hence the kernel of the induced map (c, ξ ) : G
order 2 and hence this map is an isogeny for dimension reasons. This isogeny
induces a dual isogeny
× Gm → G
G
with kernel of order 2, and so to check that the kernel is generated by (e, −1) it
suffices to prove that (e, −1) is in the kernel. But one easily checks that (χ , 1)
maps to 2θ under the natural map
) ⊕ Z → X ∗ (
X ∗ (T )
T
induced by the isogeny, and the result follows immediately by evaluating this
cocharacter at −1. Furthermore (c, ξ ) is defined over F so the dual isogeny
commutes with the Galois action used to define the L-groups.
The interested reader can use the preceding Proposition to compute exam-
ples of C-groups. For example the C-group of (GLn ) F is isomorphic to the
group (GLn × GL1 )Q × Gal(F/F), as e = (−1)n−1 and the surjection
GLn × GL1 → GLn × GL1 sending (g, μ) to (gμn−1 , μ2 ) has kernel (e, −1).
As another example, the C-group of (PGL2 ) F is isomorphic to (G L 2 )Q ×
Gal(F/F) because the kernel of the natural map SL2 ×GL1 → GL2 is (e, −1).
Note however that the C-group of (PGLn ) F is not in general (GLn )Q ×
Gal(F/F); its connected component is (SLn ×GL1 )/(−1)n−1 , −1, which is
isomorphic to SLn ×GL1 if n is odd, and to a central extension of GLn by a
cyclic group of order n/2 if n is even.
Automorphic Galois representations 175
One can use the above constructions and Conjecture 5.16 to formulate a
conjecture associating C G-valued Galois representations to C-algebraic auto-
morphic representations (and hence, by Lemma 5.52 below, to cohomological
automorphic representations) for an arbitrary connected reductive group G
over a number field. One uses Lemma 5.33 to pull the C-algebraic repre-
sentation back to a C-algebraic representation on G, twists using θ and the
recipe in the statement of Proposition 5.35 to get an L-algebraic represen-
and then uses Conjecture 5.16 on this bigger group. The map
tation on G,
denoted |.|θ −δ in the aforementioned proposition can be checked to be the map
F ) → R>0 sending g to |ξ(g)|1/2 , with ξ : G
G(A → Gm the map defined in
the proof of Proposition 5.39. Note finally that the map Gm → G induces a
map d : G → Gm .
C
Unravelling, and in particular using Remark 5.1 with the G there being
we see that Conjecture 5.16 implies the following conjecture.
our G,
Remark 5.41. The recipe for the Hodge–Tate cocharacter in the conjectures
above is as follows. As in Remark 5.18, any j : F → Q gives rise to an
176 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
We end this section by showing that the results in it imply the equivalence
of Conjectures 5.14 and 5.15 (made for all groups simultaneously).
Proof. We prove the first assertion; the second one is similar. Say G is con-
nected and reductive, and π is C-arithmetic (resp. C-algebraic). Let π be
the pullback of π to G. Then π is C-arithmetic (resp. C-algebraic) by
Lemma 5.33. By Proposition 5.36 (resp. Proposition 5.35) π ⊗ |.|θ −δ is L-
arithmetic (resp. L-algebraic). Applying Conjecture 5.14 to G we deduce
that π ⊗ |.| θ −δ is L-algebraic (resp. L-arithmetic). Running the argument
backwards now shows us that π is C-algebraic (resp. C-arithmetic).
6. Functoriality
6.1.
Suppose that G, Gare two connected reductive groups over F, and that we
have an algebraic L-group homomorphism
r : LG → LG ,
● For all infinite places v, and for all finite places v at which π and G are
(C)-conjugate to r ◦ rπv .
unramified, rπv is G
Proof. This result follows from a purely local assertion. If v is a finite place
where G and G are unramified and if k is the completion of F at v then the
morphism r of L-groups induces a morphism G →G which commutes with
the action of the Frobenius at v. If Td (resp. Td ) denotes a maximal k-split
→G
torus in G/k (resp. G /k) with centraliser T (resp. T ) then the map G
induces a map T → T (well-defined up to restricted Weyl group actions)
In addition,
Proposition 5.46. If Conjecture 5.16 holds for π , then it holds for any
functorial transfer of π .
Proof. With notation as above, one easily checks that ρπ ,ι := r ◦ ρπ,ι satisfies
all the conditions of Conjecture 5.16.
7. Reality checks
7.1.
By Proposition 2 of [Lan79] any automorphic representation π on G is a sub-
G(A )
quotient of an induction Ind P(A FF ) σ , where P is a parabolic subgroup of G
with Levi quotient M, and σ is a cuspidal representation of M. If π is another
G(A )
automorphic subquotient of Ind P(A FF ) σ , then πv and πv are equal for all but
finitely many places, so π is C-arithmetic (respectively L-arithmetic) if and
only if π is C-arithmetic (respectively L-arithmetic). The following lemma
shows that π is C-algebraic (respectively L-algebraic) if and only if π is
C-algebraic (respectively L-algebraic).
Lemma 5.47. Suppose that π and π are subquotients of a common induction
G(A )
Ind P(A FF ) σ . Then π and π have the same infinitesimal character.
Proof. This is immediate from the calculation of the infinitesimal character of
an induction – see for example Proposition 8.22 of [Kna01].
Furthermore, we can check the compatibility of Conjecture 5.16 for π and
π (note that we cannot check the compatibility for Conjecture 5.17 because π
and π may be ramified at different places).
Proposition 5.48. Suppose that π and π are subquotients of a common induc-
G(A )
tion Ind P(A FF ) σ . Suppose that π is L-algebraic. If Conjecture 5.16 is valid for
π then it is valid for π .
Proof. Suppose that Conjecture 5.16 is valid for π. We wish to show that
ρπ ,ι := ρπ,ι satisfies all the conditions in Conjecture 5.16. Since for all
but finitely many places πv and πv are unramified and isomorphic, the first
two conditions are certainly satisfied. The third condition is satisfied by
Lemma 5.47. It remains to check that if v is a real place, then (with obvi-
ous notation) λσ (i)λτ (i )rπv ( j) and λσ (i )λτ (i)rπv ( j) are G(C)-conjugate. As
explained to us by David Vogan, it follows from the results of [ABV92]
(specifically from Theorem 1.24 and Proposition 6.16) that λσ (−1)rπv ( j )
and λσ (−1)rπv ( j ) are G(C)-conjugate. It is easy to check that these are
G(C)-conjugate to λσ (i)λτ (i)rπv ( j) and λσ (i)λτ (i )rπv ( j ) respectively (one
conjugates by rπv (e−iπ/4 ), rπv (e−iπ/4 )), as required.
More generally, if π, π are nearly equivalent (that is, πv and πv are iso-
morphic for all but finitely many v), then π is C-arithmetic (respectively
L-arithmetic) if and only if π is C-arithmetic (respectively L-arithmetic). We
would like to be able to prove as above that π and π have the same infinites-
imal character, and we would like to obtain the analogue of Proposition 5.48.
Automorphic Galois representations 179
Proof. To begin with, note that for each infinite place v we have a natu-
ral injection L G v → L G, where G v is the base change of G to Fv . Since
rπv |C× is valued in L G v , as is cv := λσ (i)λτ (i)rπv ( j) if v is real, we see that
their G(C)-conjugacy
classes in L G are determined by their G(C)-conjugacy
L
classes in G v .
Now, the G(C)-conjugacy classes of semisimple elements of L G v (C) are
determined by the knowledge of the conjugacy classes of their images under
all representations of L G v (C). To see this, note that since the formation of the
L-group is independent of the choice of inner form, it suffices to check this in
the case where G v is quasi-split; but the result then follows immediately from
Proposition 6.7 of [Bor79].
Let r : L G → GLn × Gal(F/F) be a homomorphism of L-groups. Then by
Conjecture 5.43, there are automorphic representations , on GLn which
are functorial transfers of π, π respectively. By Proposition 5.49, and
have the same infinitesimal characters. Thus for each infinite place v, rv |C×
and rv |C× are conjugate, i.e. r ◦ rπ,ι |C× and r ◦ rπ ,ι |C× are conjugate. Since
this is true for all r , we see that rπ,ι |C× and rπ ,ι |C× are conjugate, whence π
and π have the same infinitesimal character.
As in the proof of Proposition 5.48, it remains to check that if v is a real place
of F, then cv := λσ (i)λτ (i)rπv ( j ) and cv := λσ (i )λτ (i)rπv ( j ) are G(C)-
conjugate. By a similar argument to that used in the first half of this proof,
we see that if r : L G → GLn × Gal(F/F) is a homomorphism of L-groups,
then r (cv ) and r (cv ) are conjugate in GLn (C). Furthermore, cv and cv are both
semisimple. Thus cv and cv are G(C)-conjugate.
180 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
H i (gv , K v ; U ⊗ Vv ) = 0.
Proof. This follows almost at once from the definition of the Harish-Chandra
isomorphism; see for example (5.43) in [Kna02].
8.2.
In [Gro99] Gross presents a conjecture which assigns a Galois representation
to an automorphic representation on a group G with the property that any
arithmetic subgroup is finite (in fact Gross gives six conditions equivalent to
182 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
φ∞ : π0 (G(R)) → {±1} ⊂ E × .
he also normalises his Satake isomorphisms so that they are constructed with
arithmetic Frobenii, so the comments of Remark 5.20 apply):
∼
Conjecture 5.55. If p is a prime, and ι : C −→ Q p , then there is a continuous
Galois representation
satisfying
8.3.
We now discuss an example drawn from [CHT08]. Let F be a totally real
field, and let E be a quadratic totally imaginary extension of F. Let G be an
n-dimensional unitary group over F which splits over E, and which is com-
pact (that is, isomorphic to U (n)) at all infinite places. Then the dual group
of G is G L n , and if we let Gal(E/F) = {1, c}, then the L-group of G is
given by
L
G = GLn Gal(F/F)
where Gal(F/F) acts on GLn via its projection to Gal(E/F) = {1, c}, with
x c := n x −t −1
n
References
[ABD+ 66] M. Artin, J. E. Bertin, M. Demazure, P. Gabriel, A. Grothendieck, M. Ray-
naud, and J.-P. Serre, Schémas en groupes. Fasc. 7: Exposés 23 à 26,
Séminaire de Géométrie Algébrique de l’Institut des Hautes Études Sci-
entifiques, vol. 1963/64, Institut des Hautes Études Scientifiques, Paris,
1965/1966. MR 0207710 (34 #7525)
[ABV92] Jeffrey Adams, Dan Barbasch, and David A. Vogan, Jr., The Lang-
lands classification and irreducible characters for real reductive groups,
Progress in Mathematics, vol. 104, Birkhäuser Boston Inc., Boston, MA,
1992. MR MR1162533 (93j:22001)
[Art02] James Arthur, A note on the automorphic Langlands group, Canad. Math.
Bull. 45 (2002), no. 4, 466–482, Dedicated to Robert V. Moody. MR
MR1941222 (2004a:11120)
[Bor79] A. Borel, Automorphic L-functions, Automorphic forms, representations
and L-functions (Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., Oregon State Univ., Corval-
lis, Ore., 1977), Part 2, Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., XXXIII, Amer. Math.
Soc., Providence, R.I., 1979, pp. 27–61. MR MR546608 (81m:10056)
[BR94] Don Blasius and Jonathan D. Rogawski, Zeta functions of Shimura vari-
eties, Motives (Seattle, WA, 1991), Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., vol. 55,
Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1994, pp. 525–571. MR MR1265563
(95e:11051)
[Bru03] Farrell Brumley, Maass cusp forms with quadratic integer coefficients, Int.
Math. Res. Not. (2003), no. 18, 983–997. MR 1962012 (2004d:11025)
186 Kevin Buzzard and Toby Gee
Contents
1 Some words about the fundamental lemma page 188
2 Local orbital integrals and their geometric interpretation 190
3 Hitchin fibration 196
4 Geometric description of Hitchin fibers 201
5 Examples of Hitchin fibers in rank 2 205
6 A truncated Hitchin fibration 210
7 The main cohomological result 213
References 219
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
188
Geometry of the fundamental lemma 189
rational conjugacy class. The point is that there exists an explicit transfer of
(regular semisimple) conjugacy classes from an endoscopic group to the group
itself and this transfer is expected to be dual to the transfer of automorphic
forms. In particular, there should be deep relations between orbital integrals on
a group and on its endoscopic groups. Conversely, if one knows these relations,
one should get, by the trace formula, character identities between automor-
phic forms which should characterize the automorphic transfer. The global
orbital integrals are products of local ones and we expect also relations bet-
ween local orbital integrals. The simplest relation and the most important one
is the fundamental lemma, a combinatorial identity between orbital integrals
for the units of the Hecke algebra. It appears in the works [17] of Labesse–
Langlands and [18] of Langlands, and it is stated in general in the work [19]
of Langlands–Shelstad.
1.4. Acknowledgement
This expository chapter is largely based on the one hand on the papers [22]
and [23] of Ngô Bao Châu and on the other hand on my work [7] and [8] with
Gérard Laumon on the weighted fundamental lemma. This text also benefits
greatly from many talks Laumon or me gave on this subject. I thank Gérard
Laumon for having shared with me some of his notes and for his help for
the figures. Finally I would like to thank the referee for carefully reading the
chapter.
over Fq and let g = gl(n) be its Lie algebra. The adjoint action of G on g is
simply the action by conjugation of G L(n) on gl(n).
Let
O = Fq [[ε]]
be the ring of power series with coefficients in Fq and let F be its fraction
field. So
F = Fq ((ε))
where the measure dg is the quotient of Haar measures on G(F) and T (F)
respectively normalized by
vol(G(O)) = 1
and
vol(X ∗ (T )\T (F)) = 1
where X ∗ (T ) is the group of F-rational cocharacters of T . Here the choice of
the uniformizer ε gives an injective morphism
X ∗ (T ) → T (F)
λ → λ(ε)
so that we can view the group X ∗ (T ) as a subgroup of T (F).
Remark 6.1. The orbital integral is finite: since the function 1g(O) is com-
pactly supported and the orbit of γ is closed, the integral can be taken over a
compact subset of T (F)\G(F).
The integral Oγ is the Lie algebra analog of an orbital integral attached to
the unit function of the spherical algebra of G(F).
be the set of γ -stable lattices. For example, the standard lattice L0 is γ -stable
if and only if γ ∈ g(O). If g ∈ G(F) and L = g · L0 then L is γ -stable if and
only if L0 is g −1 γ g-stable that is if and only if g −1 γ g ∈ g(O).
– G(F)/G(O) X
– {g ∈ G(F)/G(O) | g −1 γ g ∈ g(O)} Xγ .
From now on, let us assume that γ ∈ g(F) is regular semisimple. Remember
we have defined the orbital integral Oγ .
Oγ = |X ∗ (T )\Xγ |.
Proof. The subgroup T (F) of G(F) acts also on X. Since any element of
T (F) commutes with γ , the action preserves Xγ . By restriction, we get an
action of the subgroup X ∗ (T ). The stabilizer of a lattice in X ∗ (T ) is a compact
discrete subgroup thus a finite group: it must be trivial since the group X ∗ (T )
is a free Z-module. Hence the action of X ∗ (T ) does not have fixed points. For
the remaining equality, using our normalization of measures, we can write
&
Oγ = 1g(O) (g −1 γ g) dg
X ∗ (T )\G(F)
&
= 1g(O) ((gk)−1 γ gk) dk
Hg \G(O)
g∈X ∗ (T )\G(F)/G(O )
L1 _ Eq
EE
EE
EE
EE
o "
L @
2 / L / / L1
@@ HH
@@ HH
HH
@@ HH
@ H$ $
L2 D L1 \L1
DD v v
DD v
DD vv
D" " vvv ψ
zv
L2 \L2
L1 ⊕ L2 ⊂ L ⊂ L1 ⊕ L2 ,
we also have
εi O ⊕ ε j −i +1 O ⊂ L ⊂ εi−1 O ⊕ ε j−i O. (6.1)
over such an extension. From a geometric point of view, this implies that, after
extension of scalars to an algebraic closure k of Fq , a torus of rank n over k
acts on Xγ . Moreover, there’s a combinatorial way to get the equivariant coho-
mology of Xγ for this action from the knowledge of orbits of dimension less
or equal to one.
We have seen that orbital integrals count the number of rational points of
quotients of affine Springer fibers. Thanks to the Grothendieck–Lefschetz fixed
point formula, this gives a cohomological interpretation to orbital integrals and
also to the fundamental lemma. From their computation of the cohomology of
affine Springer fibers of reductive groups (still for “equivalued” and unramified
elements), Goresky, Kottwitz and MacPherson proved the fundamental in these
cases. In fact, it is conjectured (but until now not known) that the cohomology
of affine Springer fibers is always pure. So their hypothesis of equivaluation
could be removed. Nonetheless their use of equivariant cohomology needs a
“big” torus action which appears only in the unramified case.
3. Hitchin fibration
3.1. Notation
Let k = Fq be an algebraic closure of the finite field Fq . Let C be a connected,
smooth, projective curve over k = Fq of genus gC . Let D = 2D be an even
and effective divisor on C. We assume that
deg(D) > 2gC .
Let n be an integer such that char(Fq ) > n.
where the first arrow is the identity section and the second one is θ viewed as
an element of Hom(End(E), OC (D)). For any 1 i n, we also get sections
X n − a1 X n−1 + . . . + (−1)n an
f :M→A
defined by
f (E, θ ) = χθ .
be the ring of adèles of C where the direct limit is taken over finite subsets
S ⊂ |C|. The field F is diagonally embedded in A F . Let
"
O= Oc ⊂ A F .
c∈|C|
To the divisor D = c∈|C| n c [c], we attach an idèle - D = (-cn c )c ∈ A×
F . We
have a degree morphism
deg : A×
F →Z
deg(- D ) = deg(D).
Let
χ = X n − a1 X n−1 + . . . + (−1)n an
such that
1. deg(det(g)) = 0;
2. the characteristic polynomial of γ is χ;
3. we have the following integral condition
g −1 γ g ∈ - D−1 g(O).
The map
Let us denote
Arss (6.3)
the open subset of χ ∈ A which are square-free in the ring F[X ] of poly-
nomials with coefficients in F. The exponent rss means regular semi-simple
since the characteristic polynomial of γ ∈ g(F) is square-free if and only γ
is regular semi-simple. Let χ ∈ Arss and γ ∈ g(F) with characteristic po-
lynomial χγ = χ. Then the centralizer of γ in G is a maximal torus T and
the set of γ ∈ g(F) such that χγ = χ is simply the conjugacy class of γ
under G(F). That’s why the Hitchin fiber f −1 (χ )(k) is also equivalent to the
quotient groupoid
[T (F)\Hγ ]
where Hγ is the set of g ∈ G(A F )/G(O) such that deg(det(g)) = 0 and
g −1 γ g ∈ - D−1 g(O). There is a more suggestive way to write this quotient. Let
(γc )c∈|C| = - D γ ∈ g(A F ). (6.4)
The integrality condition 3 for g = (gc )c∈|C| ∈ G(A)/G(O) is equivalent to
gc−1 γc gc ∈ g(Oc ).
Thanks to Proposition 6.2, such a coset gc is nothing else but a k-point in the
affine Springer fiber Xγc . The Hitchin fiber f −1 (χ )(k) is thus equivalent to the
quotient groupoid
"
[T (F)\ Xγc (k)]
c∈|C|
where the restricted product means that at almost every point c we take the
standard lattice. Note that since T (F) centralizes γ it also centralizes γc and it
does act on Xγc .
centralizer of γ in G. For any c ∈ |C0 |, the groups G(Fc ) and T (Fc ) are provi-
ded with Haar measures respectively normalized by vol(G(Oc )) = 1 and the
volume of the maximal compact subgroup of T (Fc ) is 1. Let
where the element γc is defined as in (6.4), the measure is the quotient of Haar
measures on G(Fc ) and T (Fc ), the function 1g(Oc ) is the characteristic func-
tion of g(Oc ). The expression (6.5) is finite if and only if the Hitchin fiber
f −1 (χ ) has finitely many Fq -points.
Remark 6.9. For almost every c ∈ |C0 |, the element γc belongs to g(Oc ) and
moreover its image in the residue field is still regular semisimple. This implies
that the orbital integral
&
1g(Oc ) (g −1 γc g) dgc
T (Fc )\G(Fc )
is 1. At the other places, the orbital integral is finite (since the conjugacy class
of a semisimple element is closed, the integral is in fact taken over a compact
subset of T (Fc )\G(Fc )). Thus the product is finite. This is not always the case
for the volume vol(T (F)\T (A0 )0 ). In general, one can write
"
r
F0 [X ]/(χ ) = Ei
i=1
The degree morphism gives a surjection of the right-hand side onto Zr . It res-
tricts to a surjection of T (F)\T (A0 )0 onto the sublattice of (n 1 , . . . , n r ) ∈ Zr
such that n 1 + . . . + n r = 0. Thus T (F)\T (A0 )0 cannot be of finite volume
unless r = 1. In this case it is compact. The condition r = 1 means that the
polynomial χ is irreducible over F0 .
Geometry of the fundamental lemma 201
where the open set Arss of the base has been defined in (6.3). In fact, we are
going to introduce some etale open subset of Mrss . For this, we introduce ano-
ther datum, namely a closed point of C, denoted by ∞. We assume that the
point ∞ does not belong to the support of the divisor D. Let
A∞ ⊂ Arss
f :M / M ×A A /A
Theorem 6.10. (Biswas–Ramanan [6], cf. also [23] §4.14). The algebraic
stack M is smooth over k.
202 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
Remark 6.11. The main point in the above constructions is to avoid the sin-
gularities of the global nilpotent cone. The additional datum τ ∈ k n will later
play more or less the role of a parabolic structure. The datum e1 is not at all
essential but it is convenient here in order to rigidify the situation.
1. reduced ;
2. connected ;
3. not always irreducible: there is a 1 − 1 correspondence between the set
of irreducible components of Ya and the set of irreducible factors of the
characterictic polynomial χ ∈ F[X ].
The assertion 1 is due to the fact that χ belongs to the regular semisimple locus
Arss by construction of A. Let
Aell
Geometry of the fundamental lemma 203
Let us recall briefly how one can construct a Hitchin bundle from a torsion-
free OYa -module of rank 1. The multiplication by X on O gives the universal
section
O → π∗ OC (D)
Pic0 (Ya )
Recall that Ya is irreducible if and only if a belongs to the elliptic set Aell .
From the assertion 3 of Theorem 6.17, we get the corollary :
dim(M) = n 2 deg(D) + 1.
We write P1k = Spec(k[y]) ∪ {0} and in the affine chart Spec(k[y]), the point
∞ is defined by the equation y = 0. We take
D = 2[0].
206 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
– a2 has only simple roots ; the curve Ya is a smooth projective curve of genus
1: it is an elliptic curve.
– a2 has a double root and two simple roots. Then Ya is integral and has only
one singularity which is a node.
– a2 has a triple root. Then Ya is integral and has only one singularity which
is a cusp.
– a2 is the square of a polynomial with two distinct roots. Then Ya has two
irreducible components which intersect transversally.
Geometry of the fundamental lemma 207
y2 − 1 0
.
0 1 − y2
So the choice of the local modules at y± amounts to a choice of points in a pro-
duct of two affine Springer fibers. These affine Springer fibers are isomorphic
to the one we studied in Section 2. Conversely, a point in this product gives
two local modules at y± and thus a torsion-free OYa -module F of rank 1 with
a trivialization of F on Ya − {y± }. We have to get rid of this trivialization. The
group
y+1 Z 2
H 0 (U, G2m,k ) = (k × )2 (( ) ) (k × )2 × (Z2 ),
y−1
which is the group of automorphism of the trivial line bundle on Ya −{y± }, acts
on the product of affine Springer fibers. But we also want F to be of degree 0
and be trivialized at the marked point ∞1 ∈ Ya . For the first condition, we can
assume that the point belongs to a fixed connected component of the product of
affine Springer fibers, namely the product of connected components of “degree
0” of the two affine Springer fibers : this is a product of two infinite chains of
projective lines (cf. Figure 4 below).
The stabilizer in H 0 (U, G2m,k ) of both the point ∞1 and the fixed connected
component is identified with
Gm,k × Z.
The group Z acts on each chain of projective line by translation (the genera-
tor 1 ∈ Z sends a line to the next one) and the group Z acts anti-diagonally
on the product (cf. the bold arrow in Figure 4). The action of Gm,k on a
chain of projective lines fixes the split lattices and the connected components
of the complement are precisely the orbits of dimension 1. The group Gm,k
Figure 5 On the left: action of Gm,k on a square. On the right: the quotient (up to
some BGm,k ).
acts diagonally on the product of the two chains. It preserves each square in
Figure 4. On the left in Figure 5 below, we extracted a square from Figure 4
and we drew with a circle the four fixed points for the Gm,k -action. Moreover
we drew some 1-dimensional orbits for this action. The main point to observe
here is that upper orbits tend to the two bold orbits in the upper left corner.
Similarly, lower orbits tend to the two bold orbits in the lower right corner. So
when we take the quotient of the square by the action of Gm,k , each fixed point
gives a BGm,k and the quotient of the complement is a projective line with two
non-separated 0 and two non-separated ∞ (pictured in Figure 5 on the right).
Finally, the Hitchin fiber Ma can be identified with the quotient of the pro-
duct of the two chains by the action of Gm,k × Z. So, up to some BGm,k ,
the Hitchin fiber Ma is an infinite chain of non-separated projective lines (as
pictured in Figure 6). Note that it is neither of finite type nor separated.
210 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
Remark 6.23. When ξ = 0, one gets the usual stability for the underlying
Hitchin pairs (E, θ ). But here for generic ξ , we take advantage of our third
datum τ .
The notion of ξ -stability is reminiscent (through Theorem 6.14) of the work
[13] of Estèves on the compactified Jacobian.
Remark 6.24. The subbundles 0 F E such that θ (F) ⊂ F(D) are de-
termined by their generic fiber which must be a θ -stable linear subspace of the
generic fiber of E. However, by construction of M, the endomorphism θ is
generically regular semi-simple and there is only a finite number of θ -stable li-
near subspaces. Hence there is only a finite number of subbundles F satisfying
θ (F) ⊂ F(D). When m ∈ M is elliptic, the characteristic polynomial of θ is
generically irreducible and there is no such subspace and no such subbundle
F. So, any m ∈ Mell is ξ -stable for any ξ .
6.3. Properness of Mξ
Let Mξ be the ξ -stable substack of M. We say that ξ is generic if
ξi ∈
/Z
i ∈I
f ξ : Mξ → A
is proper.
Remark 6.26. As we shall see in the next example, if we take ξ = 0, the stack
Mξ is of finite type but one cannot check the existence part of the valuative
criterium of properness for f ξ . If we use a substack defined by the usual semi-
stability (for Hitchin pairs) then we get a stack of finite type which is not
separeted.
212 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
Remark 6.27. Over a finite field we can compute the number of rational points
ξ
of a truncated Hitchin fiber Ma . Perhaps a more surprising fact is that, for ξ
generic, we get essentially a global weighted orbital integral constructed by
Arthur (cf. section 11 of [7]). This generalizes proposition 6.8.
Figure 7 On the left, in grey the stable region and on the right the quotient
( Gm,k )
Figure 8 On the left, in grey the stable region and on the right the (non-separated)
quotient
There are two pairs of non-separated bold points
Geometry of the fundamental lemma 213
Figure 9 On the left, in grey the ξ -stable region (for generic ξ ) and on the right
the quotient
these vertices, the quotient is not separated. Finally, in Figure 9, the effect of
ξ -stability (for ξ generic) is to take a stair of width two squares ; the stair
contains the bold lines but no vertex. Then the quotient has no more non-
ξ
separated points and the truncated Hitchin fiber Ma is isomorphic to two
projective lines intersecting transversally. Not surprisingly, the Hitchin fiber
ξ
Ma is thus isomorphic to the spectral curve.
1. Serre’s invariant
δ A = length( Ã/A);
κ A = length(1Ã/A ).
Note that both δ A and κ A vanish for a non-singular germ. Note also that we
have κ A = m A − r A , at least when the characteristic of A is greater than the
multiplicity m A .
214 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
and
κa = κÔ
Ya ,y
y∈|Ya |
where the sum is over the set of closed points of Ya and the ring ÔYa ,y is the
completion of the local ring of Ya at y. Thus we get two constructible functions
a → δa and a → κa on A. The first one is moreover upper semi-continuous.
Let δ ∈ N and Aδ be the locally closed subset of a ∈ A such that δa = δ. For
δ = 0, we have A0 = Asm the open dense subset of a ∈ A such that Ya is
smooth.
One can write Ext2 (L , OỸa ) = Ext1 (H−1 (L), OỸa ) where H−1 (L) is the sheaf
of cohomology of L in degree −1. By Serre duality, it suffices to check that
H 0 (Ỹa , H−1 (L) ⊗ 1Ỹ ) = 0. (6.10)
a /k
+ deg(1Ỹ ) + deg(1Ỹ )
a /Ya a /k
dim(Ext1 (L , OỸa )) = dim(Ext0 (H−1 (L), OỸa ) + dim(Ext1 (H0 (L), OỸa )).
(6.11)
The sheaf H0 (L) = 1 is a torsion sheaf of length κa . Denoting by ra
Ỹa /Ya
the number of connected components of Ỹa , we can compute (6.11) by Serre
duality, the Riemann–Roch formula, the vanishing property (6.10) and the
dimension (6.2) of A: this gives
dim(Ext1 (L , OỸa )) = n(deg(D) − 2gC + 2) − κa + gỸa − ra + κa
= n(deg(D) − 2gC + 2) + gỸa − ra
n(n − 1)
= dim(A) − ( deg(D) + n(gC − 1) − gỸa + ra )
2
= dim(A) − qa + 1 + gỸa − ra
= dim(A) − δa .
216 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
The last two equalities come on the one hand from the formula for the arithme-
tic genus qa of Ya (cf. proposition 6.13) and on the other hand from the long
exact sequence in cohomology associated to
0 → OYa → OỸa → OỸa /OYa → 0. (6.12)
This is precisely expected by (6.7).
where
the next paragraph that it is possible to determine it at least if the Hitchin mor-
phism f ξ is restricted to the open subset Agood . Besides Ngô’s article [23], we
refer also the reader to [24] another article of Ngô.
Meanwhile, we would like to give some properties of the socle. Let a be an
element of the socle. The amplitude of a is defined by
Ampl(a) = m a − m a
where m a , resp. m a , is the maximum, resp. the minimum, of integers m such
that Fam = 0. By Poincaré duality, we have
Fa−m = (Fam )∨ [dim(a)]
so m a = −m a and
Ampl(a) = 2m a .
ξ )+m ξ
Moreover since Fam a appears in R dim(M a −dim(a) f ∗ Ql , we must have
dim(Mξ ) + m a − dim(a) 2 dim( f ξ ) (6.14)
2 dim( f ξ ) ξ
and we have equality in (6.14) if and only if Fam a appears in R f ∗ Ql .
We get
m a dim( f ξ ) − dim(A) + dim(a). (6.15)
So the amplitude satisfies the first inequality (with the same case of equality as
that for (6.14))
Ampl(a) 2(dim( f ξ ) − dim(A) + dim(a)). (6.16)
In what follows we will be a little sketchy (for example, we do not specify
when we have to take geometric points instead of Zariski ones). Recall (cf.
Section 4.4) that the Picard group scheme Pic0 (Ya ) acts on the Hitchin fiber
ξ
Ma . In fact, this action does not preserve the open substack Ma . But the
ξ
neutral component of Pic (Ya ), denoted by Pa , does act on Ma . It is then
0
In fact, the group scheme Paab can be identified with the the neutral component
of the Picard group scheme of the normalization Ỹa of Ya . We thus have
and by the long exact sequence in cohomology associated to the short exact
sequence (6.12) and Theorem 6.17, we get
Remark 6.30. For general groups, the support theorem is not true as stated: in
general, there are other supports besides A. But all new supports fit perfectly
in the theory of endoscopy: they are the bases of Hitchin fibration associated to
endoscopic groups. The determination of the supports is the key to the solution
of the fundamental lemma. Indeed, Ngô first checks by hand a global variant
Geometry of the fundamental lemma 219
of the fundamental lemma on a smaller set. Then, by his support theorem, the
identity extends to a larger set. Finally he gets from it the local statement by
local–global methods.
Let us briefly explain how to get Theorem 6.28. Let a be an element in the
socle. If a does not belong to the elliptic set Aell , the spectral curve has at least
two irreducible components so we have ra > 1. Thus (6.19) gives
Remark 6.31. For Hitchin fibrations for general reductive groups, the elliptic
fibers are in general not irreducible : this explains in part why there are new
supports besides A in the decomposition theorem.
References
[1] A. Altman, A. Iarrobino, and S. Kleiman. Irreducibility of the compacti-
fied Jacobian. In Real and complex singularities (Proc. Ninth Nordic Summer
School/NAVF Sympos. Math., Oslo, 1976), pages 1–12. Sijthoff and Noordhoff,
Alphen aan den Rijn, 1977.
[2] A. Altman and S. Kleiman. Compactifying the Picard scheme. Adv. in Math.,
35(1) :50–112, 1980.
[3] A. Beauville, M. Narasimhan, and S. Ramanan. Spectral curves and the generali-
sed theta divisor. J. Reine Angew. Math., 398 :169–179, 1989.
[4] A. Beı̆linson, J. Bernstein, and P. Deligne. Faisceaux pervers. In Analysis and
topology on singular spaces, I (Luminy, 1981), volume 100 of Astérisque, pages
5–171. Soc. Math. France, Paris, 1982.
[5] R. Bezrukavnikov. The dimension of the fixed point set on affine flag manifolds.
Math. Res. Lett., 3(2) :185–189, 1996.
[6] I. Biswas and S. Ramanan. An infinitesimal study of the moduli of Hitchin pairs.
J. London Math. Soc. (2), 49(2) :219–231, 1994.
[7] P.-H. Chaudouard and G. Laumon. Le lemme fondamental pondéré. I. Construc-
tions géométriques. Compos. Math., 146(6) :1416–1506, 2010.
[8] P.-H. Chaudouard and G. Laumon. Le lemme fondamental pondéré. II. Enoncés
cohomologiques. Ann. of Math., 176(3) :1647–1781, 2012.
[9] R. Cluckers, T. Hales, and F. Loeser. Transfer principle for the fundamental
lemma. In On the stabilization of the trace formula, volume 1 of Stab. Trace
220 Pierre-Henri Chaudouard
Formula Shimura Var. Arith. Appl., pages 309–347. Int. Press, Somerville, MA,
2011.
[10] P. Deligne. La conjecture de Weil. II. Inst. Hautes Études Sci. Publ. Math.,
(52) :137–252, 1980.
[11] M. Demazure, H. Pinkham, and B. Teissier, editors. Séminaire sur les Singulari-
tés des Surfaces, volume 777 of Lecture Notes in Mathematics. Springer, Berlin,
1980. Held at the Centre de Mathématiques de l’École Polytechnique, Palaiseau,
1976–1977.
[12] S. Diaz and J. Harris. Ideals associated to deformations of singular plane curves.
Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 309(2) :433–468, 1988.
[13] E. Esteves. Compactifying the relative Jacobian over families of reduced curves.
Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 353(8) :3045–3095 (electronic), 2001.
[14] M. Goresky, R. Kottwitz, and R. MacPherson. Homology of affine Springer fibers
in the unramified case. Duke Math. J., 121(3) :509–561, 2004.
[15] M. Goresky, R. Kottwitz, and R. MacPherson. Purity of equivalued affine
Springer fibers. Represent. Theory, 10 :130–146 (electronic), 2006.
[16] D. Kazhdan and G. Lusztig. Fixed point varieties on affine flag manifolds. Israel
J. Math., 62(2) :129–168, 1988.
[17] J.-P. Labesse and R. P. Langlands. L-indistinguishability for SL(2). Canad. J.
Math., 31(4) :726–785, 1979.
[18] R. Langlands. Les débuts d’une formule des traces stable, volume 13 of Publica-
tions Mathématiques de l’Université Paris VII. Université de Paris VII U.E.R. de
Mathématiques, Paris, 1983.
[19] R. Langlands and D. Shelstad. On the definition of transfer factors. Math. Ann.,
278 :219–271, 1987.
[20] S. Langton. Valuative criteria for families of vector bundles on algebraic varieties.
Ann. of Math. (2), 101 :88–110, 1975.
[21] G. Laumon. Fibres de Springer et jacobiennes compactifiées. In Algebraic geome-
try and number theory, volume 253 of Progr. Math., pages 515–563. Birkhäuser
Boston, Boston, MA, 2006.
[22] B. C. Ngô. Fibration de Hitchin et endoscopie. Invent. Math., 164(2) :399–453,
2006.
[23] B. C. Ngô. Le lemme fondamental pour les algèbres de Lie. Publ. Math. Inst.
Hautes Études Sci., (111) :1–169, 2010.
[24] B. C. Ngô. Decomposition theorem and abelian fibration. In On the stabilization
of the trace formula, volume 1 of Stab. Trace Formula Shimura Var. Arith. Appl.,
pages 253–264. Int. Press, Somerville, MA, 2011.
[25] J.-L. Waldspurger. Endoscopie et changement de caractéristique. J. Inst. Math.
Jussieu, 5(3) :423–525, 2006.
[26] J.-L. Waldspurger. L’endoscopie tordue n’est pas si tordue. Mem. Amer. Math.
Soc., 194(908) :x+261, 2008.
7
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters
of a profinite group and pseudorepresentations
over arbitrary rings
Gaëtan Chenevier
Abstract
Let1 G be a profinite group which is topologically finitely generated,2 p a
prime number and d ≥ 1 an integer. We show that the functor from rigid
analytic spaces over Q p to sets, which associates to a rigid space Y the
set of continuous d-dimensional pseudocharacters G −→ O(Y ), is repre-
sentable by a quasi-Stein rigid analytic space X , and we study its general
properties.
Our main tool is a theory of determinants extending the one of pseudochar-
acters but which works over an arbitrary base ring; an independent aim of this
chapter is to expose the main facts of this theory. The moduli space X is con-
structed as the generic fiber of the moduli formal scheme of continuous formal
determinants on G of dimension d.
As an application to number theory, this provides a framework to study rigid
analytic families of Galois representations (e.g. eigenvarieties) and generic
fibers of pseudodeformation spaces (especially in the “residually reducible”
case, including when p ≤ d).
Introduction
Let G be a group, A a commutative ring with unit and let
T : G −→ A
1 The author is supported by the CNRS, as well as by the ANR project ANR-10-BLAN 0114.
2 Actually, we only assume that for any normal open subgroup H ⊂ G, there are only finitely
many continuous group homomorphisms H −→ Z/ pZ.
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
221
222 Gaëtan Chenevier
of the divided power ring Zd (Z[G]) of degree d ([Ro2]), which is naturally
isomorphic to the, maybe more standard, ring of invariants (Z[G]⊗d )Sd : an
A-valued determinant on G of dimension d is simply a ring homomorphism
Zd (Z[G]) −→ A.
we follow is inspired from the one in [BC, Ch. 1], but we have to face sev-
eral extra difficulties inherent to the use of polynomial laws and also from the
presence of some inseparable extensions which occur in characteristic p ≤ d.
Theorem A. Let k be an algebraically closed field and D : k[G] −→ k be a
determinant of dimension d. There exists a unique semisimple representation
ρ : G −→ GLd (k) such that for any g ∈ G, det(1 + tρ(g)) = D(1 + tg).
(See Theorem 7.34) Of course, “unique” here means “unique up to k-
isomorphism”. In fact, if k is any perfect field, or any field of characteristic
p > 0 such that either p > d or [k : k p ] < ∞, we show the stronger fact that
k[G]/ker(D) is a semisimple finite dimensional k-algebra (Theorem 7.38).
Theorem B. Let A be a henselian local ring with algebraically closed
residue field k, D : A[G] −→ A a determinant of dimension d, and let ρ
be a semisimple representation attached to D ⊗ A k by Theorem A. If ρ is irre-
ducible, then there exists a unique representation ρ̃ : G −→ GLd (A) such that
for any g ∈ G, det(1 + t ρ̃(g)) = D(1 + tg).
(See Theorem 7.43) Actually, we show the stronger fact that the biggest
Cayley–Hamilton quotient of A[G] is the faithful one, and is isomorphic
to (Md (A), det). We consider also the more general case where, under the
assumption of Theorem B, ρ is only assumed to be multiplicity free, and we
show then that any Cayley–Hamilton quotient of A[G] is a generalized matrix
algebra in the sense of [BC, Ch. 1], extending a result there.
Let us stress here that Theorems A and B should not be considered as
original, as they could probably be deduced from earlier works of Pro-
cesi ([P1],[P4]) via the relations between determinants and generic matrices
established by Vaccarino, Donkin and Zubkov.
The last part of the second section deals with the problem deforming a given
determinant D0 to A[#] with # 2 = 0 (§ 2.4). The set of such deformations of
D0 appears naturally as a relative tangent space and has a natural structure
of A-module. When G is a topological group and A a topological ring, we
say that an A-valued determinant on G is continuous if the coefficients of the
characteristic polynomial D(t − g) are continuous functions of g ∈ G. The
main result here is the following (Prop. 7.63):
Proposition C. Let k be a discrete algebraically closed field, G a profinite
group, ρ : G −→ GLd (k) a semisimple continuous representation, and D0 =
det ◦ρ. Let p ≥ 0 be the characteristic of the field k. The space of continuous
deformations of D0 to k[#] is finite dimensional in the following two cases:
(a) p = 0 or p > d, and the continuous cohomology group Hc1 (G, ad(ρ)) is
finite dimensional over k,
226 Gaëtan Chenevier
(b) 0 < p ≤ d and for each open subgroup H ⊂ G, there are only finitely
many continuous homomorphisms H → Z/ pZ.
All of this being done, we are perfectly well equipped to study rigid analytic
families of pseudocharacters. Let us assume from now on that G is a profinite
topological group, fix d ≥ 1 an integer, and let p be a prime number. Assume
moreover that G satisfies the following finiteness condition: For any normal
open subgroup H ⊂ G, there are only finitely many continuous group homo-
morphisms H −→ Z/ pZ. This holds for instance when G is topologically
finitely generated, when G is the absolute Galois group of a local field of char-
acteristic = p (e.g. Q p ), or when G is the absolute Galois group of a number
field with finite restricted ramification.
Let An be the category of rigid analytic spaces over Q p in the sense of Tate
(see [BGR]). If X is such a space, we shall denote by O X its structural sheaf
and by O(X ) the Q p -algebra of global sections of O X . We equip O(X ) with
the topology of uniform convergence on the open affinoids of X . The main aim
of this chapter is to study the contravariant functor E an : An −→ Ens, which
associates to a rigid space X the set E an (X ) of continuous d-dimensional
pseudocharacters G −→ O(X ).
Theorem D. E an is representable by a quasi-Stein rigid analytic space.
(See Theorem 7.72) This rigid analytic space might be called the p-adic
character variety of G in dimension d. To show this theorem we actually start
with studying other natural functors. First, we fix a continuous semisimple
representation
ρ̄ : G −→ GLd (F p )
and whose determinant D takes values in some finite field k ⊂ F p . We consider
the continuous deformation functor F of D to discrete artinian local W (k)-
algebras with residue field k. Here W (k) denotes the Witt ring of k. We prove
first the following (Prop. 7.59):
Proposition E. F is prorepresentable by a complete local noetherian W (k)-
algebra A(ρ̄) with residue field k.
Of course, for the noetherian property we rely on Proposition C. The ring
A(ρ̄) is constructed as a certain profinite completion of
Zd (Z[G])ab ⊗Z W (k).
We consider then the functor E from the category of formal schemes over
Spf(Z p ) to sets, which associates to X the set of continuous d-dimensional
O(X )-valued determinants on G. We can attach to each such formal deter-
minant a subset of “residual determinants”. The set |G(d)| of all residual
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 227
1. Determinants of algebras
1.1. Homogeneous multiplicative A-polynomial laws
We need some preliminaries about polynomial laws between two modules. We
refer to [Ro1] and [Ro2] for the proofs of all the results stated below.
Let A be a commutative unital ring, and let M and N be two A-modules. Let
C A be the category of commutative A-algebras. Each A-module M gives rise
to a functor M : C A −→ Ens via the formula B → M ⊗ A B. An A-polynomial
law P : M −→ N is a natural transformation M −→ N . In other words, it is
a collection of maps
PB : M ⊗ A B −→ N ⊗ A B,
where B is any commutative A-algebra, which commute with any scalar exten-
sion B → B over A. By a slight abuse of notation, if B is a commutative
A-algebra and m ∈ M ⊗ A B we shall often write P(m) for PB (m). When
B = A[T1 , . . . , Ts ], we shall write M[T1 , . . . , Ts ] for M ⊗ A A[T1 , . . . , Ts ].
We refer to [Ro1] for the basic operations that we can do with polynomial
laws. If B is a commutative A-algebra and P : M −→ N is an A-polynomial
law, we will denote by P ⊗ A B : M ⊗ A B −→ N ⊗ A B the natural induced
B-polynomial law.10
We say that P is homogeneous of degree n (an integer ≥ 0) if P(bx) =
bn P(x) for all object B in C A , b ∈ B and x ∈ M ⊗ A B.
Example 7.1. Let P : M −→ N be a homogeneous A-polynomial law of
degree n.
(i) When n = 1 (resp. n = 0), PA is an A-linear11 map and PB = PA ⊗ A B
(resp. PB = PA (0) ⊗ 1 is a constant), and P → PA induces a bijec-
tion between A-polynomial laws of degree 1 (resp. 0) and Hom A (M, N )
(resp. N ).
(ii) When n = 2, PB is again uniquely determined by PA , which is any map
q : M −→ N such that q(am) = a 2 q(m) for all a ∈ A, m ∈ M, and
such that (m, m ) → q(m + m ) − q(m) − q(m ) is A-bilinear.
(iii) When n ≥ 3, PA does not determine PB in general. For instance, let
A be the finite field Fq with q elements, M = F2q and let X, Y be an
A-basis of Hom A (M, A). The A-polynomial law P : M → A defined by
10 By definition, if C is a commutative B-algebra, (P ⊗ B) = P via the isomorphism
A C C
(− ⊗ A B) ⊗ B C = − ⊗ A C.
11 Let X, Y, T be indeterminates. If u, v ∈ M, then P(u X + vY ) ∈ N [X, Y ]. As P has degree 1,
sending (X, Y ) to (X T, Y T ) shows that P(u X + vY ) is of the form a(u, v)X + b(u, v)Y for
some well-defined functions a, b : M 2 → N . By evaluating (X, Y ) at (1, 0), (0, 1) and (1, 1),
we obtain respectively a(u, v) = P(u), b(u, v) = P(v) and P(u + v) = P(u) + P(v).
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 229
P [α] : X n −→ N ,
α
where T α = in=1 Ti i .
We denote by P nA (M, N ) the A-module of homogeneous A-polynomial laws
of degree n from M to N . The functor P nA (M, −) : Mod(A) → Mod(A)
is representable by the usual A-module nA (M) of divided powers of order
n on M relative to A ([Ro1, Thm. 4.1]). Let us recall that nA (M) is natu-
rally isomorphic to the nth-graded piece of the commutative A-algebra A (M)
which is generated by the symbols m [i ] for m ∈ M and i ≥ 0, with the usual
homogeneous relations:
12 By an A-algebra we shall always mean an associative and unital A-algebra (but not
necessarily commutative).
230 Gaëtan Chenevier
induces an A-algebra structure on13 nA (R), and it turns out that the functor
MnA (R, −), from A-algebras to sets, that associates to any A-algebra S the set
of MnA (R, S) of n-homogeneous multiplicative A-polynomial laws from R to
S, is representable by the A-algebra nA (R) ([Ro2, Théorème]). In particular,
the universal homogeneous A-polynomial law
P univ : R −→ nA (R), r → r [n] ,
is multiplicative.
Remark 7.2. Let M be an A-module and let TSnA (M) be the A-submodule of
M ⊗ A invariant by the symmetric group Sn . The natural map M −→ TSnA (M),
n
D := det ◦ρ
that we shall simply denote by Z(G, d). This ring is nonzero thanks to the
trivial representation of dimension d of G. We will set also
Example 7.5. (i) When R = A[X ] is a polynomial ring in one variable, then
TSdA (R) = A[X 1 , . . . , X d ]Sd = A[1 , . . . , d ] by the classical theorem
on symmetric polynomials (with the obvious notations for X i and j ).
In particular, dA (R) = dA (R)ab A[1 , . . . , d ] by Remark 7.2. As
14 For any commutative A-algebra B, define det as the determinant M (B) → B.
B d
15 By definition, the abelianization of a ring R is the quotient of R by the two-sided ideal
generated by the x y − yx with x, y ∈ R.
232 Gaëtan Chenevier
D[α] : G d −→ A, α ∈ Id ,
which satisfy a finite number of identities coming from the requirement that
the map
"
d
[α j ]
gj → D[α] (g1 , . . . , gd ) ∈ A
j=1
We claim that given D and f satisfying this condition, the axiom of multiplica-
tivity of D is equivalent to the following set of conditions:
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 233
d
χ (r, t) := D(t − r ) =: (−1)i i (r )t d−i .
i=0
Example 7.8. (i) Let us go back to the case R = A[X ] (Example 7.5 (i)).
We already identified dA (R) with the A-algebra A[1 , . . . , d ], so any
homogeneous multiplicative A-polynomial law D : R −→ B of degree
d is uniquely determined by the image i (D) of i in B. Unravel-
ling the definitions, we see that i (D) = i (X ), hence the claim in
Example 7.5 (i).
(ii) If D : R −→ B is a homogeneous multiplicative A-polynomial law of
degree d, and r ∈ R, we can restrict it to A[X ] via the A-algebra homo-
morphism A[X ] −→ R, X → r . We get this way, and by the previous
example, all the possible identities satisfied by determinants of polynomi-
als over a single element of R. For example, the Newton relations hold,
i.e. for all r ∈ R we have the following equality in B[[t]]:
∂
∂t D(1 − tr)
−t = Tr(r n )t n . (7.3)
D(1 − tr)
n≥1
where the product on the right-hand side is taken over the finite set of Lyndon
words of length < m on the alphabet {t1 r1 < · · · < tn rn }, chosen in the
decreasing order. Applying D and inverting, we get the following equality in
B ⊗ A Am
⎛ ⎛ ⎞⎞ d
n "
D ⎝1 − ⎝ t j r j ⎠⎠ = (−1) i (w)
i
(7.4)
j =1 w∈L i=0
where the product on the right-hand side is now taken over all the Lyndon
words on the ti ri , which is a well-defined element in B[[t1 , . . . , tn ]]. More-
over, the term on the left is the image via B[t1 , . . . , tn ] −→ B ⊗ A Am of the
polynomial D(1 − ( nj=1 t j r j )) ∈ B[t1 , . . . , tn ] which does not depend on m.
As a consequence, the formula (7.4), also called Amitsur’s formula, holds in
B[[t1 , . . . , tn ]], for any integer n. If i ≥ 0 is any integer, the homogeneous part
of degree i of this equality is (for any n)
i (t1r1 + · · · + tn rn ) = #(w)(w), (7.5)
!(w)=i
where the sum is extended over the n i words w on the t j r j with length i , and if
l
w= w1l1 . . . wqq is the Lyndon factorization of w with w1 > w2 > · · · > wq ,
where
(w) = lq (wq ) · · · l2 (w2 )l1 (w1 ).
q
Indeed, observe that for each such word, we have !(w) = i = k=1 l k !(wk ),
q
( k=1 lk )−i
thus ε(w) = (−1) . Equality (7.5) holds a priori in B[[t1 , . . . , tn ]] but
both sides belong to B[t1 , . . . , tn ], hence it obviously holds in B[t1 , . . . , tn ].
Sending each ti to 1, we finally get Amistur’s formula for i (r1 + · · · + rn )
(in B).
Let us check now part (iii) of the Lemma. Let us look at Amitsur’s for-
mula (7.5) with i = n = d + 1, and consider its homogeneous component with
degree 1 in each t j . We see at once that it is exactly the d + 1-dimensional
pseudocharacter identity for 1 = Tr.
Remark 7.10. Assume more generally that B is any associative A-algebra
(not necessarily commutative) and D ∈ Md (R, B). Then the definition of the
i also makes sense in this extended context and the same proof as above
shows that Amitsur’s formula 7.5 still holds (the increasing ordering chosen in
the definition of (w) is important in this case). However, assertion (iv) only
makes sense when A = B.
To prove assertion (iv), it amounts to show that i (χα (r1 , . . . , rn )r ) = 0
for all r, r1 , . . . , rn ∈ R and i ≥ 1. We will prove it now only for i = 1.
As 1 is A-linear, and replacing R by R[t1 , . . . , tn ], it is enough to show that
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 237
a+b=d a=0
RO
D / A
O
π⊗ϕ X ϕX
det ◦ρ univ
Z{X} ⊗Z E X (d) / E X (d)
Now, all the assertions of Lemma 7.9 follow at once from this diagram
and the classical formulae in matrix rings (here Md (FX (d))). For example for
part (iv), the Cayley–Hamilton theorem shows that for r1 , . . . , rn ∈ X = R,
ρ univ (χα (r1 , . . . , rn )) = 0, so
D(1 + r χα (r1 , . . . , rn )) = det(ρ univ (1 + r χα (r1 , . . . , rn ))) = 1.
Remark 7.13. Actually, part (iv) would follow from an apparently weaker
version of Theorem 7.12: For any (finite) set X , Zd (Z{X })ab = TSdZ (Z{X })ab
is torsion free as abelian group20 . Unfortunately, as pointed out to us by Vac-
carino, this is actually equivalent to Theorem 7.12 in view of Procesi’s results.
Proof. Assertion (iii) follows from the transitivity of tensor product. Moreover,
it is clear that if P = P◦π for some A-submodule K ⊂ M as in the statement,
then K ⊂ ker(P). We need to check that for any A-submodule K ⊂ ker(P),
P factors through a polynomial map P : M/K −→ N .
Let B be a commutative A-algebra and consider K B := Im(K ⊗ A B −→
∼
M ⊗ A B). Then (M/K ) ⊗ A B → (M ⊗ A B)/K B and K B ⊂ ker(P ⊗ A B)
by part (iii). In particular, the map PB : M ⊗ A B −→ N ⊗ A B satisfies
PB (k + m) = PB (m) for any M ∈ M ⊗ A B and k ∈ K B , hence we obtain a
well-defined map P B : (M/K ) ⊗ A B −→ N ⊗ A B via the formula
Lemma 7.15. Let R and S be two A-algebras and P ∈ MdA (R, S).
Proof. Denote by J1 (P) and J2 (P) the two sets on the right in the two
equalities in part (i). Let r ∈ ker(P), B a commutative A-algebra, and
m = 1 + h ∈ R ⊗ A B. We want to show that the elements P(1 +r (1 + th)) and
P(1 + (1 + th)r ) of S ⊗ A B[t] are the unit element. As they are polynomial
of degree d in t, it is enough to check that this holds in S ⊗ A B[t]/(t d+1 ). But
1 + th is invertible in R ⊗ A B[t]/(t d+1 ) thus the multiplicativity assumption
implies that
and for the same reason P(1 + (1 + th)r ) = 1, so ker(P) ⊂ J1 (P), J2 (P).
The same argument shows conversely that Ji (P) ⊂ ker(P), hence ker(P) =
J1 (P) = J2 (P).
By (i), ker(P) is a two-sided ideal of R. As P(1) = 1 we have P(1 − t) =
(1 − t)d , thus 1 ∈
/ ker(P) if d > 0. Part (ii) follows from formula (7.7) as in
the proof of Lemma 7.14 (i).
G −→ (A[G]/CH(D))∗ .
of [BC, §1.3] (and all such algebras occur somehow this way; when d! ∈ A∗ ,
this result follows from [BC, Thm. 1.4.4]).
Remark 7.20. (The embedding problem) The embeding problem is to
decide whether the CH-algebra (R(G, d), D univ ) admits a CH-embedding in
(Md (B), det) for some commutative ring B. A result of Procesi [P3] asserts
that it holds after tensoring by Q, but the result over Z still seems to be
open (see [V3]). The problem is local on X (G, d), and there are some par-
tial known results. For instance, we will show in Theorem 7.43 that it holds at
x ∈ X (G, d) (i.e for R(G, d) ⊗ Ox ) whenever x is multiplicity free (compare
with [BC, Prop. 1.3.13]).
ρ : R −→ Md (C)
such that tr ◦ ρ = T . But then det(ρ(x)) = D(x) is multiplicative, and we are
done.
Remark 7.22. The proposition might hold under the weaker assumption
d! ∈ A∗ but we don’t know how to prove it in general, namely: we don’t know
how to show that the obvious A-polynomial law of degree d attached to a
pseudocharacter T : R −→ A is multiplicative (compare with [BC, Remark
1.2.9]). However, using structure theorems for pseudocharacters over fields
and over local rings instead of [P3], we know that this holds in either of the
following situations:
(i) A is reduced,
(ii) For all x ∈ Specmax(A), and k an algebraic closure of the residue field at
x, the induced pseudocharacter T ⊗ A k is multiplicity free (use [BC, Prop.
1.3.13] and [BC, Thm.1.4.4]).
In general, it would be enough (actually equivalent) to know that if G is the
free monoid over two letters {a, b}, and T : Z[G] −→ A is the universal
pseudocharacter on G of dimension d (with d! ∈ A∗ ), then A (which is easy
to describe by generators and relations) is torsion free over Z. The next result
is an evidence for the general case.
Proposition 7.23. Assume:
(i) either that 2 is invertible in A and d = 2,
(ii) or that (2d)! is invertible in A,
then the map D → Tr defined in § 1.3 induces a bijection between the set
of d-dimensional A-valued determinants on R and the set of d-dimensional
A-valued pseudocharacters on R.
Proof. We first show (i). For x, y ∈ R set f (x, y) = T (x)T (y) − T (x y) and
D(x) = f (x, x)/2. Then f : R × R −→ A is an A-bilinear map and D :
R −→ A is a quadratic A-map with associated bilinear map f . In particular,
D defines a quadratic A-polynomial law R −→ A which satisfies D(1) = 1
(see Example 7.1 (ii)). We have to check that D(x y) = D(x)D(y) for all
x, y ∈ R. We check at once as in Example 7.6 that it suffices to show that for
all x, x , y, y ∈ R, we have
f (x y, x y ) + f (x y , x y) = f (x, x ) f (y, y ). (7.9)
For m ≥ 1, σ ∈ Sm and x = (x1 , . . . , xm ) ∈ X m , set T σ (x) = T (xi1 . . . xir )
c
if x is the cycle (i 1 , . . . , ir ), and T σ (x) = i T (x) if σ =
i
i ci is the
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 245
Let B = Z[1/2][S4 ] be the group ring of S4 over Z[1/2] and consider the
two elements of B
1
p := s(h)h, q = ε(g)g
8
h∈H g∈S3
We have21
IndS S4
H s = V , IndS3 ε = ε ⊕ V .
4
(7.11)
∼ "
d
dA (S1 × S2 ) → iA (S1 ) ⊗ A d−i
A (S2 ). (7.16)
i =0
so x ∈ ker(D), and x = 0.
250 Gaëtan Chenevier
In what follows, A is a local ring with maximal ideal m and residue field
k := A/m. We will denote by R the k-algebra R ⊗ A k = R/m R, and by D the
induced determinant D ⊗ k : R −→ k.
Lemma 7.33. Assume that D is Cayley–Hamilton.
(i) The kernel of the canonical surjection R −→ R/kerD is Rad(R).
(ii) If m s = 0 for s ≥ 1 an integer, and if d! is invertible in A, then
Rad(R) N (d)s = 0.
Proof. Let J be the two-sided ideal of the statement (i); we check first that
J ⊂ rad(R). It is enough to check that 1 + J ⊂ R ∗ , i.e. D(1 + J ) ∈ A∗ , but
this is obvious as D(1 + J ) ∈ 1 + m by definition. In particular, m R ⊂ rad(R),
hence to check the converse we may (and do) assume that A = k and even that
D is faithful. But then rad(R) = 0 by Lemma 7.31 (ii).
Assume that m s = 0. Replacing R by R/m R if necessary, we may assume
that A = k is a field and we have to show that Rad(R) N (d) = 0. Here N (d)
is the integer coming from the Nagata–Higman theorem, in particular N (d) ≤
2d − 1. We conclude by the equality Rad(R) = ker(D) and Lemma 7.30.
is algebraic over k (resp. k sep ) of degree less than n, and that the length of
families of orthogonal idempotents of R ⊗k k sep is also bounded by n. Then
∼ "
s
R→ Mn i (E i )
i=1
where E i is a division k-algebra which is finite dimensional over its center
ki . Moreover, each ki is a finite separable extension of k, unless maybe k has
q
characteristic p > 0, in which case k[ki ] is separable over k where q is the
biggest power of p less than n.
In particular, R is semisimple. It is finite dimensional over k in each of the
following three cases: k is a perfect field, or k has characteristic p > 0 and
[k : k p ] < ∞, or p > n.
Proof. Let A be a commutative k-algebra such that each element of A is alge-
braic over k of degree less than n, and that the length of families of orthogonal
idempotents of A is also bounded by n. If k has characteristic p > 0 we define
q as in the statement, and we set q = 1 else. Then we check at once that there
is a k-algebra isomorphism
∼ "
r
A→ Ai
i=1
where r ≤ n and where Ai is a field whose maximal separable k-subextension
q
Aiet is finite dimensional over k (with dimension ≤ n), and satisfies Ai ⊂
Aiet . These facts apply in particular to the center Z of R. We get moreover
that dimk (Z ) < ∞ in the three cases discussed in the last assertion on the
statement.
We prove now that R is semisimple. Let M be a simple R-module, E
the division k-algebra End R (M). We claim first that M is finite dimensional
over E. Indeed, by Jacobson’s density theorem, we know that either M is
finite dimensional over E and R −→ End E (M) Ms (E opp ) is surjective,
or for each r ≥ 1 there is a k-subalgebra Sr ⊂ R and a surjective k-algebra
homomorphism Sr −→ Mr (E opp ), but this second possibility is impossible
as elements of R (hence of Sr ) are algebraic over k of bounded degree by
assumption.
We claim now that there are only finitely many (pairwise non isomor-
phic) simple R-modules M1 , . . . , Ms , which will conclude the proof. Indeed,
assuming this claim and as Rad(R) = 0, there is a natural injective
homomorphism
"s
opp
R −→ Mni (E i ), (7.20)
i =1
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 255
∼ "
s
R→ Mn i (k).
i =1
m
representation ⊕i=1
s
Mi i . As a semisimple representation is well known to be
uniquely determined by its characteristic polynomials (Brauer–Nesbitt’s the-
orem), this representation is unique up to isomorphism. As ρ is obviously
injective, the second assertion on kerρ follows. This concludes the proof of
Theorem 7.34.
We now investigate the case of a general field k, starting with the following
useful observations.
Let K be a field extension of k and denote by k ⊂ K the maximal separable
k-subextension of K . Assume that k is finite over k. If p := char(k) > 0
assume also that there exists a finite power q of p such that K q ⊂ k . We
define the exponent ( f, q) ∈ N2 of K /k by f = [k : k], q = 1 if K = k , and
q is the smallest power of p = char(k) > 0 as above if K = k .
Let S be a central simple K -algebra with rank n 2 over K and reduced norm
N : S −→ K , let Nk /k : k −→ k be the usual norm (i.e. the determinant
of the regular k-representation) and F q : K −→ k the qth-Frobenius law (see
Ex. 7.32). Then we have a natural determinant
det S : S −→ k
of dimension nq f defined by det S = Nk /k ◦ F q ◦ N .
Theorem 7.38. Let D : R −→ k be a determinant of dimension d. Then as a
k-algebra
∼ "
s
R/ker(D) → Si
i =1
∼ "
f
K ⊗k k sep → Ki
i =1
q
where K i = K .k sep is a separable algebraic closure of K such that K i ⊂ k sep
(and q is still minimal for that property), and where Gal(k sep /k) permutes
transitively the K i . Moreover,
∼ "
f
sep sep
S ⊗k k = S ⊗ K (K ⊗k k )→ Si ,
i=1
Example 7.42. (The absolute irreducible locus) Let G be group (or a unital
monoid) and d ≥ 1 an integer. If x ∈ X (G, d), we say that x is absolutely
irreducible if the induced determinant k(x)[G] −→ k(x) has this property,
where k(x) is the residue field at x. Let
X (G, d)irr ⊂ X (G, d)
be the subset of absolutely irreducible points. It is a Zariski open subset.
2
Indeed, for each sequence of elements g = (g1 , . . . , gd 2 ) ∈ G d , consider
the abstract d 2 × d 2 matrix
m g = (Tr(gi g j )) ∈ Md 2 (Z(G, d)),
where Tr = 1 is the trace of the universal determinant of G of dimension
d, and define I ⊂ Z(G, d) as the ideal generated by the det(m g ) when g
varies in all the sequences as above. Then X (G, d)irr = X (G, d) − V (I ) by
Definition-Proposition 7.40, hence the claim.
∼ "
s
ϕ : R/ker(D) → Mni (k)
i=1
such that D = det ◦ϕ and is=1 n i = d. Call Di the determinant of the
representation R −→ Mn i (k) on the ith factor, so D = si=1 Di .
260 Gaëtan Chenevier
P = D0 + #"
I := ker(D0 ) ⊂ R.
ker(P) = R ∩ ker(D),
(The Hom and Ext above are understood in the category of (left)
R-modules.)
0 −→ I −→ R −→ R/I −→ 0,
Let us study now a more specific example where those concepts apply.
Assume that A = k is a field, and that S := R/I is a finite dimensional
semisimple k-algebra. Recall that by Theorem 7.38, this is always the case if
k is perfect, or if char(k) = p > 0 and [k : k p ] < ∞, or if d < p. Let
M1 , . . . , Mr denote the simple S-modules and M := ⊕ri=1 Mr .
Proposition 7.48. Assume either char(k) = 0 or char(k) > d. If Ext1R (M, M)
is finite dimensional over k, then so is T .
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 263
Proof. For any semisimple ring S, the left S-module S is a finite direct sum
of simple modules, hence Ext1R (S, S) is a finite dimensional k-vector space
by assumption. As a consequence, the S-module Hom S (I /I 2 , S) is also finite
dimensional over k by Lemma 7.47, which implies that I /I 2 has a finite length
as S-module as S is semisimple, hence dimk I /I 2 < ∞. But then R/I 2N (d) is
also finite dimensional over k and we are done by Lemma 7.46.
Assume moreover that R = k[G] and say that k is perfect. Let ρ :
G −→ GLd (k) denote the unique semisimple representation of G such that
det(1 − tρ(g)) = D0 (1 − tg) for all g ∈ G (Thm. 7.34), the assumption in the
proposition is equivalent to
dimk H 1 (G, ad(ρ)) < ∞,
which generalizes a well-known result in the case ρ is irreducible (see the
remark below).
Remark 7.49. It would be interesting to know whether the known improve-
ments of the Nagata–Higman theorem (as Shirshov’s height theorem) lead to a
generalization of this proposition to fields of characteristic ≤ d. The arguments
above actually give an explicit upper bound for dimk T , which is however
very bad in general.24 For example, when ρ is defined over k (say) and irre-
ducible, Theorem 7.43 and a standard argument give a natural identification
∼
T → H 1 (G, ad(ρ)), which is much finer than what we got by the previous
analysis. When ρ is defined over k and multiplicity free (and in the context of
pseudocharacters), this space T has recently been studied by Bellaïche [B].
of G , so D1 = D2 .
n
From now on, we equip A, as well as all the commutative A-algebras B, with
the discrete topology, and we assume that G is a profinite group. In this context,
a B-valued determinant D on G is continuous if, and only if, the characteristic
polynomal map
G −→ B[t], g → D(1 + tg)
and to equip A[G] with the topology defined by this filtered set of ideals.
G −→ (B[G]/ker(D))∗
and this latter space is naturally a subvector space of the space of continuous
G-extensions of k[G]/I by itself, which does not depend on H , and which is
finite dimensional by assumption.
Remark 7.55. The proof above shows moreover that if Hc1 (G, ad(ρ)) = 0,
then T c = 0.
Proof. Let X be a finite set and Z{X } the free ring on X , and set m = |X |. By
assumption there is a surjective A-algebra homomorphism
A{X } := A ⊗Z Z{X } −→ R,
sending x ∈ X to the matrix (xi, j )i, j , and that E X (d) ⊂ B is the subring
generated by the coefficients of the characteristic polynomials of the elements
of ρ univ (Z{X }). Clearly we have E X (d) ⊂ B H and a theorem of S. Donkin
([D, Thm. 1 and §3]) shows that E X (d) = B H . As GLd /Z is reductive (and
in particular reduced), and as H −→ PGLn (C) has a Zariski-dense image, a
general result of Seshadri [S, Thm. 2] implies that E X (d) = B H is a finite
type Z-algebra. By the result of Vaccarino (Theorem 7.12) recalled in § 1.3,
Zd (Z{X }) E X (d), and we are done.
Corollary 7.57. Assume that G is finitely generated and fix d ≥ 1.
(i) Z(G, d) is a finite type Z-algebra,
(ii) There exists a finite set X ⊂ G such that for each commutative ring A
and any two d-dimensional determinants D1 , D2 : A[G] −→ A, then
D1 = D2 if and only if χ D1 (x, t) = χ D2 (x, t) for all x ∈ X .25
Proof. Part (i) is a special case of the proposition and part (ii) follows from part
(i) and Amitsur’s formula (see Lemma 7.11): E X (d) is generated as Z-algebra
by the coefficients of the χ (g, t) for g ∈ G.
Let W (k) be the ring of Witt vectors of k. Let C be the category whose
objects are the local W (k)-algebras which are finite (as a set) and with residue
field isomorphic to k, and whose morphisms are W (k)-algebra homomor-
phisms. If A ∈ Ob(C), we will denote by m A its maximal ideal. The given
∼
map W (k) → A induces then a canonical isomorphism k → A/m A , and we
shall always identify A/m A with k using this isomorphism. We shall always
equip such an A with the discrete topology. Moreover any arrow A −→ A is
local, i.e. sends m A into m A , and is continuous. We define a covariant functor
F : C −→ Ens
This means that there is a profinite local W (k)-algebra A(ρ̄) with residue
field k, and a determinant
such that for any A ∈ Ob(C) and D ∈ F(A), there is a unique continuous
W (k)-algebra homomorphism ϕ D : A(ρ̄) −→ A such that D(ρ̄) ⊗ϕ D A = D.
Such a pair (A(ρ̄), D(ρ̄)) is unique, if it exists.
B = W
d
(k) (W (k)[G]) = W (k) ⊗Z Z (Z[G]) ,
ab d ab
Recall that for a profinite local W (k)-algebra B, say with maximal ideal m
and residue field k, the following properties are equivalent:
(F) For any open subgroup H ⊂ G, there are only finitely many continuous
group homomorphisms H −→ Z/ pZ.
Proposition 7.63. Assume either that (F) is satisfied, or that p > d and
Hc1 (G, ad(ρ̄)) is finite dimensional. Then C(ρ̄) holds.
Proof. In the second case, it follows from Proposition 7.54. When G is topo-
logically of finite type we already explained that C(ρ̄) holds. When we only
assume (F), we are reduced to this case by the following lemma. Indeed, if
F ∗ : C → Ens is the determinantal deformations of ρ̄ viewed as a represen-
tation of G/H , the lemma shows that the natural transformation F ∗ −→ F is
an equivalence.
Proof. We have to check that D(T − gh) = D(T − g) for all g ∈ G and h ∈ H .
We may assume that A is a finite ring. By Lemma 7.52, we may assume that
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 271
D factors through a finite quotient G . By Lemma 7.33 and Theorem 7.38, the
radical of the finite ring
B := A[G ]/ker(D)
Assume that C(ρ̄) is satisfied, and consider the affine formal scheme
X (ρ̄) := Spf(A(ρ̄))
X (ρ̄) := X (ρ̄)[1/ p]
attached to X (ρ̄) by Berthelot. Our next aim is to describe the functors that
those two spaces represent. More generally, we will identify them as com-
ponent parts of the universal formal (resp. rigid analytic) determinant of
dimension d.
where the limit is taken over a directed ordered set S with minimal element 0,
Aλ is a discrete ring, and each Aλ → A0 is surjective with nilpotent kernel.
An object A is said topologically of finite type over Z p , if it is a quotient of
the topological ring28
Z p [[t1 , . . . , ts ]]x1 , . . . , xr
28 Recall that At is the A-subalgebra of A[[t]] of power series a t n with a → 0 (say A is
n n n
admissible here).
272 Gaëtan Chenevier
Proof. Assume first that A is discrete, in which case the assumption reads
p n A = 0 for some integer n ≥ 1. Let P : (Z/ p n Z)[G] −→ A the con-
tinuous multiplicative polynomial law associated to D. By Lemma 7.52, P
factors through (Z/ p n Z)[G/H ] for some normal open subgroup H ⊂ G. But
Z/
d
pn Z ((Z/ p Z)[G/H ]) is a finite ring as G/H is finite, hence so is the ring
n
of the statement which is (by Amitsur’s relations) the image of the natural ring
homomorphism
d n
Z/ p n Z ((Z/ p Z)[G/H ]) −→ A
Dz : k(z)[G] −→ k(z).
By Theorem 7.38, and Example 7.53, |G(d)| is in bijection with the set of con-
tinuous semisimple representations G −→ GLd (F p ) taken up to isomorphism
and Frobenius actions on coefficients.29
E : F −→ Ens
As a start, let us fix some z ∈ |G(d)| and let ρ̄z : G −→ GLd (k(z)) be “the”
continuous semisimple representation such that det(1 + t ρ̄z (g)) = Dz (1 + gt)
for all g ∈ G (see Example 7.53).
It is then essentially formal to deal with E rather than a given E z . For that
we need to extend E and the E z to the category F S/Z p of all formal schemes
over Spf(Z p ).
) be the set of continuous determinants
For an object X of F S/Z p , let E(X
O(X )[G] −→ O(X ) of dimension d, which makes
: F S/Z p −→ Ens
E
Corollary 7.69. Assume that condition (F) holds for G (see 3.1). Then E
(resp. E z ) is representable by the formal scheme z∈|G(d)| Spf(A(z)) (resp.
by Spf(A(z))).
each open affine U. From this we check at once as in Lemma 7.58 that E
and Ez are sheaves for the Zariski topology on F S/Z p . As E
z coincides
opp
with E z on F opp , we have (by Proposition7.68) a canonical isomorphism
∼
z → Spf(A(z)). The assertion on E
E follows then from Lemma 7.65 (i).
Proof. We first check (i). Recall that an element of an affinoid algebra A has
bounded powers if and only if its image in all the residue fields A/m has norm
≤ 1: we may assume that A is a finite extension of Q p . Fix g ∈ G; up to replac-
ing A by a finite extension, we may assume that D(t−g)= di=1 (t−xi ) ∈ A[t]
splits in A, and we have to show that each xi has norm 1. As D(g) ∈ A∗ , each
xi is in A∗ . By Newton’s relations (or by Theorem 7.34), D(t−g n ) = di=1 (t−
xin ) for each n ∈ Z. By the continuity assumption, D(t − g n ) = i (t − xin )
goes to (t − 1)d (in Ad ) when n tends to 0 in Z, and it is a simple exercise to
conclude.
We check (ii); it only remains to see the surjectivity of ι. Let D ∈ E an (A)
and A ⊂ A a model of A. Consider the compact subset K = ∪i=1 d
i (G) ⊂ A.
As A is open in A, K meets only finitely many of the translates of A. In
particular, there exists a finite number of elements k1 , . . . , ks ∈ K such that
s
K ⊂ (ki + A).
i =1
4. Complements
We keep the notation of § 3. Let us assume that condition (F) holds for G and
denote by X the formal scheme E =
z∈|G(d)| Spf(A(z)) and X = X
rig =
X irr ⊂ X
30 Of course, when an absolutely irreducible D(x) is not split, but splits over L/k , we get such
x
an interpretation for the L-algebra O x ⊗k L.
x
31 Recall that if L is a field and if R is an Azumaya algebra over L of rank d 2 , that is a central
simple L-algebra of dimension d 2 , and if ρ : G → R ∗ is a group homomorphism, then ρ is
said to be absolutely irreducible if
ρ̄ : G −→ GL2 (F2 )
the trivial representation. Our main aim here is to study the generic fiber X (ρ̄)
of the universal deformation of det(ρ̄) : F2 [G] → F2 as in §3.1, and more
precisely its odd locus, i.e. the closed and open subspace
X (ρ̄)odd ⊂ X (ρ̄)
F odd ⊂ F
D0 (T − g) = (T − 1)2 ∈ A[T ], ∀g ∈ G.
The p-adic analytic space of pseudocharacters of a profinite group 281
(2 + #τ, 1 + #δ)
τ (g −1 h) = τ (gh), ∀g, h ∈ G,
or which is the same τ (h) = τ (g 2 h) for all g, h ∈ G. The lemma follows then
from Lemma 7.7.
Let us go back now to the case of the Galois group G, for which G/G 2
F2 ×F2 . By Lemma 7.76, and taking into account the odd condition, the tangent
space F odd (F2 [#]) is isomorphic to the F2 -vector space of pairs of maps (τ, δ)
with τ (1) = τ (c) = 0 and δ : G/G 2 → F2 a group homomorphism with
δ(c) = 0, so
dimF2 (F odd (F2 [#])) = 3.
dimF2 (m/m 2 ) ≤ 4,
and it only remains to show that the Krull dimension of A(ρ̄)odd is at least 4, or
better that the Krull dimension of A(ρ̄)odd [ 12 ] is at least 3. For that it is enough
to show that for some (closed) point x ∈ X (ρ̄)odd , the completed local ring
OX,x has Krull dimension at least 3. Indeed, the Krull dimension of a local
noetherian ring does not change after completion, and O X,x is (canonically)
isomorphic to the completion of A(ρ̄) [ 2 ] at its maximal ideal defined by x
odd 1
by the global Euler characteristic formula of Tate (and as ρ" is odd). This
concludes the proof of (7.23), and of Theorem 7.74.
Remark 7.77. (i) If g ∈ G is any element such that g and −1 generate topo-
∼
logically G ab → Z∗2 , we actually showed that A(ρ̄)odd = Z2 [[Tr(g) −
2, Tr(cg) − 2, D(g) − 1]], where Tr and D denote the universal trace and
determinant.
(ii) A maybe more elementary method to show the smoothness of F odd would
have been to study abstractly the relations occuring in the process of lifting
determinants.
(a) Over the whole of X (ρ̄), Tr factors through the maximal pro-2 quotient P
of G.
(b) Over X (ρ̄)+ , Tr factors through G/H where H is the closed normal
subgroup of G generated by c.
Indeed, assuming (a) and (b), Tr factors through the quotient of P by the
image H of H in P. But (P/H )ab = Z∗2 /{±1} is monogenic, so P/H =
Z∗2 /{±1} by Frattini’s argument.
Part (b) above follows from the fact that
e := (1 − c)/2
continuous semisimple representation such that det(T − ρ̄(g)) ∈ k[t] for all
g ∈ G).
As a consequence, we may replace G by its quotient G = Z∗2 /{±1} Z2 to
study X (ρ̄)+ , which is now a trivial exercise. Consider the (pro-representable)
subfunctor
F + =: Spf(A(ρ̄)+ ) ⊂ F
of deformations of det(ρ̄) as determinants on G . Its generic fiber is X (ρ̄)+ ,
and we claim that F + Spf(Z2 [[x, y]]). Indeed, as G /G 2 F2 ,
Lemma 7.76 shows that
dimF2 F + (F2 [#]) = 2.
It remains to show that the Krull dimension of A(ρ̄)+ is at least three. Consider
two copies χi : Z2 −→ Z2 [[Ti ]]∗ , i = 1, 2, of the universal 2-adic character
of Z2 (1 being sent to 1 + Ti ), and set
D := χ1 χ2 , Z2 [G] −→ Z2 [[T1 , T2 ]].
This 2-dimensional determinant takes its values in the subring33 Z2 [[x, y]]
where x = T1 + T2 and y = T1 T2 . The induced map
A(ρ̄)+ −→ Z2 [[x, y]]
is clearly surjective, hence an isomorphism, which concludes the proof of
Theorem H.
Remark 7.78. We showed that the universal pseudocharacter on X (ρ̄)± is
everywhere absolutely reducible: precisely, it becomes a sum of two characters
over a covering of X (ρ̄)± of degree 2 by the 2-dimensional open unit ball. In
the same vein, it is easy to determine the reducible locus of X (ρ̄)odd : in terms
of the coordinates x = Tr(g) − 2, y = Tr(cg) − 2 and z = det(g) − 1 (see
Remark 7.77); it is given by the relation
x 2 − y 2 = 4(1 − x + y + z).
Moreover, we could show that over X (ρ̄)odd there exists a continuous repre-
sentation G → GL2 (O) whose trace is the universal pseudocharacter Tr.
References
[A] S. A. Amitsur, On the characteristic polynomial of a sum of matrices, J.
Linear and Multilinear Algebra 8, 177–182 (1980).
33 Note that this ring coincides with Z [[T , T ]]S2 .
2 1 2
284 Gaëtan Chenevier
Abstract
Résumé. Nous déterminons les vecteurs localement analytiques des représen-
tations de la série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p )
Abstract We identify the locally analytic vectors of representations from the
unitary principal series of GL2 (Q p )
Contents
Introduction page 288
0.1 Notations 288
0.2 La correspondance de Langlands locale p-adique pour
GL2 (Q p ) 289
0.3 (ϕ, )-modules triangulables de rang 2 291
0.4 La série principale localement analytique 293
0.5 Céoukonfaikoi 295
0.6 Remerciements 296
1 Cohomologie de R(δ) 297
1.1 L’anneau de Robba R 297
1.2 Dictionnaire d’analyse fonctionnelle p-adique 298
1.2.1 Quelques faisceaux P + -équivariants sur Z p 298
1.2.2 Dualité 301
1.2.3 Le théorème d’Amice 302
1.3 Extensions de (ϕ, )-modules et cohomologie de A+ 303
1.4 Cohomologie de + et − 304
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
286
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 287
Introduction
0.1. Notations
Soit p un nombre premier. On fixe une clôture algébrique Q p de Q p , et on
note GQ p = Gal(Q p /Q p ) le groupe de Galois absolu de Q p et WQ p ⊂ GQ p
son groupe de Weil (qui est dense dans GQ p ). Si g ∈ WQ p , on note deg(g) ∈ Z
si x ∈ F p . Soit χ : GQ p → Z∗p le caractère
deg(g)
l’entier défini par g(x) = x p
cyclotomique. Si F∞ = Q p (μ p∞ ), alors HQ p = ker χ = Gal(Q p /F∞ ), ce
qui permet de voir χ aussi comme un isomorphisme de = GQ p /HQ p =
Gal(F∞ /Q p ) sur Z∗p ; on note a → σa son inverse.
On fixe une extension finie L de Q p , et on note O L l’anneau de ses entiers.
Soit T(L) l’ensemble des caractères continus δ : Q∗p → L ∗ . La notation est
justifiée par le fait que T(L) est l’ensemble des points L-rationnels d’une va-
riété analytique T. On note juste x ∈ T(L) le caractère induit par l’inclusion
de Q p dans L, et |x| le caractère envoyant x ∈ Q∗p sur p −v p (x) . Si δ ∈ T(L),
δ(u) ∗
on note w(δ) son poids, défini par w(δ) = log log u , où u ∈ Z p n’est pas une
racine de l’unité.
L’abélianisé WQabp de WQ p est isomorphe à Q∗p d’après la théorie locale du
corps de classes, ce qui permet de voir un élément de T(L) aussi comme un
caractère continu de WQ . De manière explicite, si g ∈ WQ et δ ∈ T(L),
p p
alors δ(g) est défini par la formule
δ(g) = δ( p)− deg(g) δ(χ (g)).
Si δ est unitaire (i.e. si δ est à valeurs dans O L∗ ), alors δ se prolonge par conti-
nuité à GQ p , ce qui permet aussi de voir δ comme un caractère de GQ p , et w(δ)
est alors le poids de Hodge-Tate généralisé de δ. Par exemple x|x|, qui est uni-
taire, correspond au caractère cyclotomique χ ; son poids est 1 et il sera noté
χ dans l’article.
On note:
• G le groupe GL2 (Q p ),
Q∗ Q p
• B = 0p Q∗ le borel supérieur,
p
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 289
. a 0 ∗
/
• Z= 0 a , a ∈ Q p le centre de G,
∗
• P = Q p Q p le mirabolique,
0 1
• N = 10 Q1p l’unipotent supérieur,
Q∗ 0 ∗
• T = 0p Q∗ le tore maximal déployé, et A = Q p 0 son sous-groupe,
p 0 1
Zp
• P + ⊂ P le semi-groupe Z p −{0} 0
,
1 0
• A+ = A ∩ P + le semi-groupe Z p −{0} que l’on décompose sous la forme
+ + +
pN 00 1 0 Z∗ 0
A = × A , avec = 0 1 et A = p
0 (si n ≥ 1, on note An
1+2 p n Z p 0 0 1
le sous-groupe de A0 ),
0 1 0 1
• w la matrice 1 0 .
0 → (V )∗ ⊗ ω D → D P1 → (V ) → 0,
0 → ( (V )an )∗ ⊗ ω D → Drig P1 → (V )an → 0,
[0] le
On note aussi "[0] le sous-E † -module des éléments de " d’ordre 0 et "
[0] [0] [0]
E -module E ⊗E † " (si " = Drig , alors " = D et " = D). On a alors
†
le résultat suivant.
Théorème 8.1. J ∗ ( (")) est non nul si et seulement si " est triangulable.
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 291
Autrement dit, J ∗ ( (")) est non nul si et seulement si (" [0] ) est de la
série principale unitaire. Si " est triangulable, on peut décrire explicitement le
module J ∗ ( (")) et en déduire la structure de la représentation ("), mais
cela va demander d’introduire un certain nombre de no(ta)tions.
ng
On partitionne S∗ sous la forme S∗ = S∗ S∗cris S∗st S∗ord
ncl
S∗ , où
ng
• S∗ est l’ensemble des s tels que w(s) ne soit pas un entier ≥ 1 ;
• S∗cris est l’ensemble des s tels que w(s) soit un entier ≥ 1, u(s) < w(s) et
L = ∞;
• S∗st est l’ensemble des s tels que w(s) soit un entier ≥ 1, u(s) < w(s) et
L = ∞ ;
• S∗ord est l’ensemble des s tels que w(s) soit un entier ≥ 1, u(s) = w(s) ;
• S∗ncl est l’ensemble des s tels que w(s) soit un entier ≥ 1, u(s) > w(s).
ng
Enfin, on pose Sirr = S∗ S∗cris S∗st , et on note S∗HT (resp. S∗dR )
l’ensemble des s ∈ Sirr tels que w(s) ∈ Z − {0} (resp. w(s) ∈ N − {0}).
Alors S∗dR = S∗st S∗cris et S∗HT est la réunion disjointe de S∗dR et
ng
de S∗HT ∩ S∗ qui est l’image de S∗ncl par l’application (δ1 , δ2 , L ) →
(x −w(s) δ1 , x w(s) δ2 , L ) (on a d’ailleurs L = ∞ dans cette situation).
Le résultat suivant [10, th. 0.5] rassemble les principales propriétés de "(s).
• V (s) est cristabéline (i.e. devient cristalline sur une extension abélienne de
Q p ) si et seulement si s ∈ S∗cris ,
• V (s) est la tordue d’une représentation semi-stable (non cristalline) par un
caractère d’ordre fini si et seulement si s ∈ S∗st ,
• V (s) est de Hodge-Tate si et seulement si s ∈ S∗HT et elle est de Rham si et
seulement si s ∈ S∗dR .
x −w(s) δ2−1 χ ).
(iii) Si s ∈ S∗cris , alors J ∗ (s) = (δ1−1 ⊗ δ2−1 χ ) ⊕ (x −w(s) δ2−1 ⊗ x w(s) δ1−1 χ )
sauf si s est exceptionnel où ces deux caractères sont égaux et J ∗ (s) =
(δ1−1 ⊗ δ2−1 χ ) ⊗ 10 v p (a/d)
1
.
0.5. Céoukonfaikoi
Cet article contient quatre chapitres de natures assez distinctes et un appendice
complétant la première partie.
2 Pas totalement car l’existence de la correspondance de Langlands locale p-adique se
démontre par prolongement analytique à partir du cas de la série principale unitaire. . .
296 Pierre Colmez
0.6. Remerciements
Cet article a pour origine une question que m’a posée Matthew Emerton
pendant l’École d’été de 2008. Je le remercie de me l’avoir mentionnée. Je
remercie le programme CEFIPRA d’avoir financé le séjour au Tata Institute
en juillet-août 2010 au cours duquel une première version de cet article a été
terminée. Je remercie aussi les universités UCLA et UC Berkeley (et l’Institut
Miller qui a financé le séjour à Berkeley) pour leur hospitalité en janvier-février
et à l’automne 2011 ; des parties conséquentes de cet article y ont été écrites.
3 Dospinescu [16] a remarqué que l’on pouvait aussi utiliser l’action infinitésimale [15] de N
au lieu de ϕ pour calculer J ∗ ( (")).
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 297
1. Cohomologie de R(δ)
Ce chapitre est consacré à la démonstration d’une version renforcée (th. 8.47)
du (ii) de la prop. 8.2 qui décrit l’espace Ext1 (R(δ2 ), R(δ1 )) des extensions de
R(δ2 ) par R(δ1 ), si δ1 , δ2 sont des caractères de Q∗p . Cette démonstration re-
pose sur le dévissage 0 → D(Z p ) → R → LA(Z p ) ⊗ χ −1 → 0 de R fourni
par le dictionnaire d’analyse fonctionnelle p-adique (no 1.2), et sur l’interpré-
tation de Ext1 (R(δ2 ), R(δ1 )) en terme de cohomologie du semi-groupe A+
que l’on dévisse en utilisant la suite spectrale de Hochschild-Serre (no 1.3).
On note ∂ l’opérateur (1 + T ) Td . On a ∂ ◦ ϕ = p ϕ ◦ ∂, ∂ ◦ ψ = p −1 ψ ◦ ∂
et ∂ ◦ σa = a σa ◦ ∂, si a ∈ Z∗p .
Soit t = log(1 + T ). C’est un élément de R + vérifiant ∂t = 1, ϕ(t) = pt,
ψ(t) = p −1 t et σa (t) = a t si a ∈ Z∗p . On note L{{t}} le sous-anneau de R +
des n∈N an t n , où (an )n∈N est une suite d’éléments de L telle que n∈N an z n
converge pour tout z ∈ C p ; ce sous-anneau est stable par ∂, ϕ, ψ et .
Si n ≥ 1, on note ιn l’injection de E ]0,rn ] dans L n [[t]] envoyant f sur f
n
(ζ pn et/ p − 1). Alors ιn commute à , et on a ιn+1 ◦ ϕ = ιn et ιn ◦ ψ =
Tr Fn+1 /Fn ◦ ιn+1 .
Si f = n∈Z an T n ∈ R, on pose rés0 ( f dT ) = a−1 .
Proposition 8.10. Si f ∈ R, on a :
dT
• rés0 σa ( f ) 1+T
dT
= a −1 rés0 f 1+T , pour tout a ∈ Z∗p ,
dT
• rés0 ϕ( f ) 1+T
dT
= rés0 ψ( f ) 1+T
dT
= rés0 f 1+T ,
dT
• rés0 ∂ f 1+T = rés0 d f ) = 0.
Démonstration. Pour les deux premiers points, cf. [12, prop. I.2.2] ; le dernier
est immédiat.
Zp
Soit P + le semi-groupe Z p −{0}0 1
. On munit R d’une action de P + en
posant
pk a b
0 1
· f = (1 + T )b ϕ k ◦ σa ( f ), si k ∈ N, a ∈ Z∗p et b ∈ Z p .
0 → D(Z p ) → R → LA(Z p ) ⊗ χ −1 → 0.
1 −x p k a b
φ pk a b (x) = rés0 0 1 0 1
z dT
1+T = rés0 σa ((1 + T )(b−x)/a ϕ k (z)) dT
1+T
z
0 1
= a rés0 ψ k ((1 + T )(b−x)/a ϕ k (z)) 1+T
−1 dT
a −1 rés0 (1 + T )(b−x)/ p a z) 1+T = χ −1 ( p k a)φz ( b−x
k dT
pk a
) si x ∈ b + pk Z p ,
=
0 si x ∈ b + pk Z p .
Resi+ pn Z p = 10 1i ◦ ϕ n ◦ ψ n ◦ 10 −1
1 . (Ceci ne dépend pas du choix de la
décomposition [12, § III.1].) On note R U l’image de ResU .
300 Pierre Colmez
(ii) Si D(Z p ), on a:
x p 0
• ψ(Aμ ) = Aψ(μ) , où Zp φ ψ(μ) = pZ p φ p μ et donc 0 1
·ψ(μ) =
Res pZ p μ,
• ResU Aμ = AResU μ , avec Zp φ ResU μ = U φμ= Zp 1U φ μ,
• ∂ Aμ = A xμ .
• Si μ ∈ D(Z p ), alors t Aμ = Adμ , où Zp φ dμ = Zp φ (x) μ.
(calculer ∂ f ).
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 301
1.2.2. Dualité
On définit un accouplement { , } sur R(δ) × R(χ δ −1 ) par la formule
{ f ⊗ δ, g ⊗ χ δ −1 } = rés0 σ−1 ( f )g 1+T
dT
.
quand i → +∞.
−1 ,
Proposition 8.19. Si f = n≥1 an T les conditions suivantes sont équiva-
lentes :
(i) v p (an ) ≥ v p [ pnh ]! et v p (an ) − v p [ pnh ]! → +∞ quand n → +∞.
, h dans O L .
(ii) z → {z, f } s’étend en une forme linéaire continue de PD
(iii) φ f ∈ LA0h .
poser A0 sous la forme " × A1 , où " est un groupe fini et A1 est un groupe
topologiquement isomorphe à Z p et dont on note σu un générateur (alors u est
un générateur de 1 + 2 pZ p ).
Si M est un L-espace vectoriel topologique muni d’une action continue de
A+ , la suite spectrale de Hochschild-Serre nous fournit des isomorphismes
H 0 ( A+ , M) ∼
= H 0 ( A0 , H 0 (+ , M)) et H 2 (A+ , M)
∼
= H 1 ( A0 , H 1 (+ , M)),
1.4. Cohomologie de
+ et
−
Soit δ ∈ T(L). On a déjà expliqué comment voir δ comme un caractère
de A+ ⊂ P + ; on peut aussi le voir comme un caractère de A− en posant
δ(ψ n σa ) = δ( p)−n δ(a). Le dual du A+ -module M ⊗ δ est alors le A− -module
M ∗ ⊗ δ −1 .
• H 0 (+ , D(Z p ) ⊗ δ −1 ) ∼
= H 1 (+ , D(Z p ) ⊗ δ −1 ) ∼
= L(x i δ −1 ),
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 305
• H 0 (− , LA(Z p ) ⊗ δ) ∼
= H 1 (− , LA(Z p ) ⊗ δ) ∼
= L(x −i δ).
Démonstration. Si φ est dans le noyau de 1 − αψ, c’est que φ(x) = αφ( px),
pour tout x. Alors φ(x) = α n φ( p n x), pour tout x, ce qui montre que φ
est analytique sur Z p tout entier, et que si φ(x) = i
i ≥0 ai x sur Z p ,
+∞
alors i=0 ai (1 − αp )x est identiquement nul sur Z p . Ceci implique que
i i
(i) Si α ∈
/ { p i , i ∈ N}, il existe u : LA(Z p ) → LA(Z p ), linéaire continu, tel
que u ◦ (1 − αϕ) soit l’identité sur LA(Z p ).
(ii) Si α = p i , avec i ∈ N, il existe u : LA(Z p ) → LA(Z p ), linéaire continu,
tel que l’image de u ◦ (1 − αϕ) − 1 soit contenue dans L · 1Z p x i .
forme k−1 j=0 a j (1−αϕ)1Z p x +φk , où φk a un zéro d’ordre k en 0 (avec ai = 0
i
si α = pi ). La série − n≥1 α −n ψ n (φk ) converge dans LA(Z p ), ce qui permet
−n n
de définir u par la formule u(φ) = k−1 j =0 a j 1Z p x −
i
n≥1 α ψ (φk ). Pour
vérifier que u ◦ (1 − αϕ) vérifie les propriétés désirées, il suffit alors de prouver
que u ◦ (1 − αϕ) · f = f si f a un zéro d’ordre au moins k car le résultat est
évident pour un polynôme de degré ≤ k − 1. Or, dans ce cas, φ = (1 − αϕ) f
a un zéro d’ordre au moins k en 0, et donc φ = φk . Comme (1 − αϕ) f (x) =
f (x) − α1 pZ p f xp , et donc ψ n ((1 − αϕ) f )(x) = f ( p n x) − α f ( p n−1 x) si
n ≥ 1, on obtient:
−n
u(φ)(x) = − α ( f ( pn x) − α f ( p n−1 x))
n≥1
= α −n f ( p n x) − α −n f ( p n x) = f (x).
n≥0 n≥1
On en déduit le résultat.
Lemme 8.27. Soit α ∈ L ∗ . Alors 1 − αϕ : LA(Z p ) → LA(Z p ) est injectif et
son image est fermée.
De plus:
nulle sur p n+1 Z p . Il s’ensuit que l’on peut écrire tout élément φ de LA(Z p )
308 Pierre Colmez
1.5. Cohomologie de A0
R(δ)
1.5.1. Sur
n
On rappelle que An est le sous-groupe 1+2 0p Z p 10 de A0 , si n ≥ 1. On note
X n le groupe des caractères de A0 / An (que l’on identifie aussi au groupe des
caractères de Z∗p , constants modulo 1 + 2 p n Z p ).
D’après le lemme 8.27, cela implique que x est dans l’image de D(Z p ) ⊗ δ,
et donc appartient à L · t i , avec i ∈ N, d’après le lemme 8.28 (la transformée
d’Amice de di Dir0 est t i ). On conclut(4) en utilisant le fait que σa (t i ) = a i t i ,
si a ∈ Z∗p .
Proposition 8.34. L’image de σu −1 est fermée dans LA(Z∗p )⊗η et D(Z∗p )⊗η.
De plus :
1.5.3. Cohomologie de A1
Soit δ : Z∗p → O L∗ un caractère continu. On choisit un générateur topolo-
gique u de 1 + 2 pZ p .
Lemme 8.37. δ(u)σu − 1 est surjectif sur LA(Z∗p ) et admet une section
continue ; son noyau est le L-espace vectoriel de base les 1i+2 pZ p δ, pour
i ∈ ".
Démonstration. Remarquons que σu laisse stable LA(i + 2 pZ p ) pour tout
i ∈ ", et que le changement de variable x = iu −y permet de ramener l’étude
de δ(u)σu − 1 sur LA(i + 2 pZ p ) à celle de ατ − 1 sur LA(Z p ), où α = δ(u)
vérifie v p (α − 1) > 0 car 1 + 2 pZ p est un pro- p-groupe, et τ : LA(Z p ) →
LA(Z p ) est défini par (τ (φ))(y) = φ(y + 1).
L’étude de ατ −1
peut se faire en utilisant ledéveloppement
de Mahler de φ :
si φ = n≥0 an ny et (ατ −1)·φ = n≥0 bn ny , on a bn = (α −1)an +αan+1
y
puisque τ ny = ny + n−1 . Si les bn sont donnés ce système d’équation a
une unique solution une fois a0 fixé, à savoir celle définie par récurrence par
an+1 = α −1 (bn − (α − 1)an ) ; par ailleurs, il existe s > 0 tel que v p (bn ) ≥
ns + C, avec C ∈ R, pour tout n ∈ N, et une récurrence immédiate montre que
v p (an ) ≥ (n − 1)s + C , avec s = inf(s, v p (α − 1)) et C = inf(C, v p (a0 )),
ce qui implique que n≥0 an ny ∈ LA(Z p ). En résumé, ατ − 1 est surjectif,
admet une section continue (celle pour laquelle a0 = 0), et son noyau est de
dimension 1 (et donc est engendré par y → α −y ). On en déduit le résultat car
α −y = δ(i)−1 δ(x).
Lemme 8.38. δ(u)σu − 1 est injectif sur D(Z∗p ) et l’image de δ(u)σu − 1 est
constituée des μ vérifiant i+2 pZ p δ −1 μ = 0, pour tout i ∈ " ; en particulier,
elle est fermée dans D(Z∗p ).
Démonstration. C’est une traduction, par dualité, du lemme 8.37.
Corollaire 8.39. (i) H 0 (A1 , LA(Z∗p ) ⊗ δ) et H 1 (A1 , D(Z∗p ) ⊗ δ −1 ) sont de
dimension [A0 : A1 ] et duaux l’un de l’autre (isomorphes à L["] comme
A0 -modules).
(ii) H 1 (A1 , LA(Z∗p ) ⊗ δ) et H 0 (A1 , D(Z∗p ) ⊗ δ −1 ) sont nuls.
Démonstration. C’est une simple traduction des lemmes 8.37 et 8.38.
Remarque 8.40. Il ne faudrait pas croire que l’image de σu − 1 est toujours
fermée. Par exemple, on vérifie facilement, en utilisant le lemme 8.37, qu’un
élément φ de LA(Z p ) est dans l’image de δ(a)σa − 1 si et seulement si on a
a
φ(x) = j≥0 a j x j au voisinage de 0 et la série j≥0 δ(a)a −j j −1 x j a un rayon
de convergence non nul (ce qui inclut la condition ai = 0 si δ(x) = x −i ).
312 Pierre Colmez
On voit donc que l’image de σu −1 sur LA(Z p )⊗δ est fermée si et seulement
si w(δ) n’est pas un nombre de Liouville p-adique (i.e. si lim sup n1 v p (w(δ)
−n) < +∞). Si w(δ) est de Liouville, cette image est dense mais σu − 1 n’est
pas surjectif.
1.6. Cohomologie de A+
1.6.1. A valeurs dans LA(Z p ) ⊗ δ et D(Z p ) ⊗ δ −1
Proposition 8.41. L’image de σu − 1 est fermée dans H j (± , LA(Z p ) ⊗ δ)
et H j (± , D(Z p ) ⊗ δ −1 ), si j = 0, 1. De plus:
(i) Si δ ∈
/ {x i , i ∈ N}, alors
+ −i 0 si δ = x i ,
dim H (A , H ( , LA)) = dim H (A , L(x
1 0 1 1 0
δ)) =
1 si δ = x i .
• Soit Y = {μ ∈ D(Z∗p ), Z∗p x i μ = 0} ⊗ δ −1 , de telle sorte que la suite
0 → L(x i δ −1 ) → H 0 (− , D) → Y → 0 soit exacte (c’est la suite exacte
duale de la suite 0 → X → H 1 (+ , LA) → L(x −i δ) → 0 du point
précédent). On a H 0 (A0 , Y ) = 0 puisque H 0 (A0 , D(Z∗p ) ⊗ δ −1 ) = 0 et
dim L H 1 (A0 , Y ) = 1 (cela suit de la prop. 8.34, de la suite exacte 0 →
Y → D(Z∗p ) ⊗ δ −1 → L(x i δ −1 ), et du lemme 8.31). On en déduit les
formules
0 si δ = x i ,
dim H 0 (A0 , H 0 (− , D)) = dim H 0 (A0 , L(x −i δ)) =
1 si δ = x i ,
− −i 1 si δ = x i ,
dim H (A , H ( , D)) = 1 + dim H (A , L(x
1 0 0 1 0
δ)) =
2 si δ = x i .
Démonstration. Il est clair sur la construction que l’on a bien défini des co-
cycles. Comme les espaces au départ et à l’arrivée ont la même dimension, il
suffit donc, pour conclure, de vérifier que les cocycles ainsi construits ne sont
pas des cobords, autrement dit que l’on ne peut pas avoir (g−1)·((φ− f )⊗δ) =
0, pour tout g ∈ A+ , avec φ ∈ LA et f = 1Z p δ ou f = 1Z p x i !, ce qui est clair
car la condition (ϕ − 1) · ((φ − f ) ⊗ δ) = 0 implique que φ et f coïncident
sur Z p − {0}.
H 0 (+ , R(δ)) ∼
= H 0 (+ , D) et H 1 (− , R(δ)) ∼
= H 1 (− , LA),
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 315
H 1 (A+ , R(δ)) ∼
= H 1 (A+ , LA(Z p ) ⊗ χ −1 δ),
316 Pierre Colmez
montrent que l’action de G sur Indan W est alors donnée par g·φ = φ6g −1 ,
avec
ax + b
φ 6 ac db (x) = 1/(cx+d)
0
c/(ad−bc)
(cx+d)/(ad−bc) · φ cx + d .
318 Pierre Colmez
Indan (δ2 ⊗ χ −1 δ1 ) ∼
= B an (δ1 , δ2 ).
On note N le sous-groupe 10 Q1p de G. Si est une représentation locale-
ment analytique de G, on note J ∗ () = (∗ ) N le module de Jacquet dual de
. Ce module est stable par B, puisque B normalise
. N , et donc / est muni d’une
action de B (déterminée par celle de T = a0 d0 , a, d ∈ Q∗p puisque N agit
trivialement).
a Siχ1 , χ2 ∈ T (L), on note χ1 ⊗ χ2 le caractère de B défini par
(χ1 ⊗ χ2 ) 0 d = χ1 (a)χ2 (d).
b
Remarque 8.51. (i) Si μ ∈ J ∗ () − {0} est propre sous l’action de B pour
le caractère δ, alors v → φ̃v , où φ̃v : G → L est définie par φ̃v (g) =
μ, g · v, est un morphisme G-équivariant de dans Indan δ −1 . En effet,
si h ∈ B, on a φ̃v (hg) = μ, hg · v = h −1 · μ, g · v = δ −1 (h)φ̃v (g).
(ii) L’orthogonal Q p de J ∗ () est l’adhérence de l’espace engendré par
les (u − 1) · v, pour v ∈ et u ∈ N , et J ∗ () est le dual du module
de Jacquet J () = /( Q p ) de . Comme d’habitude, l’application
v → φv (g) = g · v (image de g · v dans J ()), induit un morphisme
G-équivariant de dans Indan J ().
Alors W (δ1 , δ2 ) est une représentation de dimension finie dont la duale est
W (δ1 , δ2 )⊗χ δ1−1 δ2−1 (cela suit de ce que la duale de Symk est Symk ⊗ x −k ).
Ext1 (Wk , X k ) ∼
= Ext1 (1, X k ⊗ Wk∗ ) ∼
= H 1 (G, X k ⊗ Wk∗ ).
On
a bnote e2 , pour 0 ≤ i ≤ k, la base standard de Symk = Wk∗ (on a
i k−i
ie1k−i
c d · e1 e2 = (ae1 + ce2 )i (be1 + de2 )k−i ). Comme Wk est irréductible,
le lemme de Schur montre que H 0 (G, Wk ⊗ Wk∗ ) est$ de dimension 1, et un
petit calcul montre que (xe1 + e2 )k en est une base il suffit
de vérifier que
(xe1 + e2 )k est stable par a0 01 , pour a ∈ Q∗p , par 10 b1 pour b ∈ Q p , et
%
par 01 10 . L’isomorphisme Ext1 (Wk , X k ) ∼= Ext1 (1, X k ⊗ Wk∗ ) s’obtient de
la manière suivante.
les relations
n −1
p
n
cβ( pn b) = α( p ) · cβ(b) et cβ( p n b) = β( jb) · cβ(b) .
j =0
k +
Écrivons cβ(b) sous la forme i k−i
i=0 φi e1 e2 , où φi = φi + Pi v + p + Q i log ,
avec φi ∈ B an (χ , x −k ) tendant vers 0 en ∞ et Pi , Q i des polynômes de de-
gré ≤ k ; écrivons de même cβ( p n b) sous la forme ik=0 φn,i e1i e2k−i . La seconde
relation ci-dessus nous donne
n −1
k p
k
i k−i
φn,i (x)e1 e2 = φi (x − jb)e1i ( jbe1 + e2 )k−i .
i=0 j =0 i=0
Comme il existe r ∈ N tel que les φi soient analytiques sur a + pr Z p , pour
tout a ∈ Q p , l’identité ci-dessus montre que φn,i est analytique sur pr Z p , pour
tout n ∈ N. Maintenant, la première relation ci-dessus nous donne φn,i (x) =
p ni φi pxn . Il en résulte que φi est analytique sur pr−n Z p pour tout n ∈ N ;
c’est donc la restriction à Q p d’une fonction analytique sur C p . Par ailleurs,
φi − Pi v p −Q i log est la restriction d’une fonction analytique dans un voisinage
de ∞, nulle en ∞ ; On en déduit que Ri = Pi v p + Q i log est analytique sur
la couronne v p (x) ≤ −N , si N ∈ N est assez grand, ce qui implique que
Pi = Q i = 0 (dériver permet de se ramenener au cas où Pi et Q i sont des
constantes, et on montre que Pi = Q i = 0 en considérant le développement de
Laurent de Ri (ax) − Ri (x), pour a ∈ Q∗p ). Il en résulte que φi est la restriction
d’une fonction analytique sur P1 (C p ) (et donc une constante), nulle à l’infini et
donc partout puisque constante. En résumé, on a cβ(b) = 0 pour tout b ∈ Q p .
On en déduit le (i) puisque B est engendré par A et les β(b), pour b ∈ Q p .
322 Pierre Colmez
3. Le module {0}
Ce chapitre est consacré à l’étude du module " {0} = ∩n∈N ϕ n ("), si " est
un (ϕ, )-module sur R. Il est clair que " {0} est muni d’une structure de
(ϕ, )-module sur ∩n∈N ϕ n (R), et on prouve que ce dernier anneau est égal
à L{{t}} et que " {0} est libre sur L{{t}}, de rang inférieur ou égal à celui
de " sur R (et même que l’application naturelle R ⊗ L{{t}} (" {0}) → "
est injective). La démonstration repose sur un théorème de structure pour les
ϕ-modules de type fini sur L{{t}} (th. 8.65) et le fait que ∩n∈N ϕ n (Fr(R)) =
Fr(L{{t}}) (th. 8.77).
sur celui des diviseurs effectifs, localement finis et définis sur L ; de plus,
g ∈ I − {0} si et seulement si Div(g) − Div(I ) est un diviseur effectif.
Les
actions de ϕ et sur R + induisent des automorphismes de L{{t}} : on
aϕ n∈N an t
n = n∈N p n an t n et σb ( n∈N an t n ) = n∈N an bn t n .
Lemme 8.60. Un idéal de L{{t}}, de type fini et stable par ou par ϕ, est de
la forme (t k ), avec k ∈ N.
Démonstration. Soit I un idéal de L{{t}}, de type fini et stable par , et soit
D = α∈C p n α [α] le diviseur associé.
α)ak t .
k
3.1.2. ϕ-modules
Un ϕ-module M sur L{{t}} est un L{{t}}-module libre de type fini, muni d’une
action semi-linéaire bijective de ϕ (on remarquera qu’il suffit que l’action soit
surjective pour qu’elle soit bijective).
Lemme 8.63. Soit M un ϕ-module de rang d sur L{{t}}, et soit v ∈ M tel
qu’il existe α ∈ L ∗ avec ϕ(v) = αv. Alors il existe k ∈ N tel que t −k v ∈ M et
M/L{{t}}t −k v soit libre (de rang d − 1) sur L{{t}}.
326 Pierre Colmez
Démonstration. Quitte à étendre les scalaires, on peut supposer que toutes les
valeurs propres de ϕ sur M appartiennent à L. Soit α une valeur propre de
ϕ sur M de valuation minimale, et soient v un vecteur propre pour cette va-
leur propre et ṽ un relèvement de v dans M. Si n ∈ N, soit u n = α −n ϕ n (ṽ) ;
on a u n+1 − u n = α −n ϕ n (x), où x = α −1 ϕ(ṽ) − ṽ ∈ t M. L’hypothèse se-
lon laquelle α est de valuation minimale implique que l’on peut trouver une
base de M dans laquelle la matrice de α −1 ϕ soit à coefficients dans O L . On
peut relever cette base en une base de M sur L{{t}} (en appliquant un élé-
ment de GLd (L) bien choisi à une base quelconque de M), et dans la base
e1 , . . . , ed obtenue, la matrice B de α −1 ϕ est à coefficients dans O L + t L{{t}}.
Comme la matrice de α −1 ϕ dans la base te1 , . . . , ted de t M est p B, et comme
celle de α −n ϕ n = (α −1 ϕ)n est p n B(t)B( pt) · · · B( p n−1 t), on en déduit que
α −n ϕ n (x) → 0 quand n → +∞, et donc que u n a une limite u quand
n → +∞. Comme u n a pour image v dans M, pour tout n, il en est de même
de u. Par ailleurs, on a ϕ(u) = αu par construction. On en déduit, grâce au
lemme 8.63, que M = M/(L{{t}}u) est un ϕ-module libre de rang d − 1 sur
L{{t}}. On peut donc lui appliquer l’hypothèse de récurrence et relever tout
élément x de M β = (M/Lv)β , si β est une valeur propre de ϕ sur M /t M , en
un élément x̃ de M tel que (ϕ − β)n x̃ ∈ t L{{t}}u, pour n assez grand. Il existe
alors a ∈ t L{{t}} tel que (ϕ − β)n x̃ = au, et il résulte du lemme 8.61 que l’on
peut trouver b ∈ t L{{t}} tel que (αϕ − β)b = a (resp. (αϕ − β)b − a ∈ Lt i ),
si β ∈ / p N−{0} α (resp. si β = pi α, avec i ≥ 1). Alors x̃ − bu est un relèvement
de x dans Mβ . On en déduit le résultat.
Théorème 8.65. Si M est un ϕ-module de rang d sur L{{t}}, il existe une base
e1 , . . . , ed de M dans laquelle la matrice de ϕ est A + N , où A ∈ GLd (L) est
semi-simple, inversible, et N est nilpotente, commute à A, et se décompose
sous la forme N = N0 + t N1 + t 2 N2 + · · · , où Ni ∈ Md (L) envoie le noyau
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 327
On en déduit que :
si v p (α)≥rn |n α | < +∞, pour tout n ≥ a ; il est défini sur L si n g(α) = n α ,
pour tout α ∈ C p et g ∈ Gal(Q p /L).
Si f ∈ E ]0,ra ] est non nul, alors Div( f ) = α∈Ca vα ( f )[α] est un diviseur
sur Ca localement fini et défini sur L. Si I est un idéal non nul de type fini (et
donc principal) de E ]0,ra ] , on note Div(I ) le diviseur Div( f ), pour n’importe
quel générateur f de I . L’application I → Div(I ), ainsi définie, induit une
bijection de l’ensemble des idéaux non nuls et de type fini de E ]0,ra ] sur celui
des diviseurs effectifs, localement finis et définis sur L ; de plus, g ∈ I − {0}
si et seulement si Div(g) − Div(I ) est un diviseur effectif.
Soit D = α∈Ca n α [α] un diviseur localement fini. On dit que D est Ca -
stable par μ p n (n = ∞ inclus) si n ζ (1+α)−1 = n α pour tous α ∈ Ca et ζ ∈ μ p n
tels que ζ (1 + α) − 1 ∈ Ca .
Lemme 8.69. Si D = α∈Ca n α [α] est effectif, localement fini, défini sur L
et Ca -stable par μ p ∞ , il existe g ∈ L{{t}} ⊂ E ]0,ra ] tel que D = Div(g) (en
tant que diviseur sur Ca ).
Démonstration. Soit D = α∈C p n β [β] le diviseur sur C p défini par n β =
n α , si log(1 + α) = β. Comme deux solutions de l’équation log(1 + α) =
β s’obtiennent à partir de l’une d’entre elles en faisant agir μ p∞ , la condition
selon laquelle D est Ca -stable par μ p∞ implique que D est bien défini. Il est
alors facile de voir que D est localement fini et défini sur L, et donc est le
diviseur d’un élément g de L{{t}} (vu comme une fonction analytique de t sur
C p ). Par construction, le diviseur de g vu comme une fonction analytique sur
Ca via le changement de variable t = log(1 + T ) est alors D. On en déduit le
résultat.
Soient U = { f ∈ R + , f (0) = 1} et Ua ⊂ U l’ensemble des f ne
s’annulant pas sur Da .
Lemme 8.70. Tout élément non nul f de E ]0,ra ] peut s’écrire sous la forme
f = f + f {0} , avec f + ∈ Ua , et f {0} ∈ (E ]0,ra ] )∗ .
Démonstration. Soit D = 0<v p (z)≤ra vz ( f ) z le diviseur de f . Si b ≥ a,
l’ensemble {z, rb < v p (z) ≤ ra et vz ( f ) = 0} est fini et on a vσ (z) ( f ) =
vz ( f ), si σ ∈ Gal(Q p /L). Ces conditions impliquent l’existence de f + ∈
Ua dont le diviseur est D, et alors g = ( f + )−1 f ne s’annule pas sur Ca
et donc appartient à (E ]0,ra ] )∗ = (E (0,ra ] )∗ . Ceci prouve l’existence d’une
décomposition sous la forme souhaitée.
Corollaire 8.71. Tout élément non nul f de Fr(E ]0,ra ] ) peut s’écrire sous
+
la forme f = f {0} ff − , avec f + , f − ∈ Ua sans zéros communs, et f {0}
∈ (E ]0,ra ] )∗ .
330 Pierre Colmez
+
Si f = f {0} ff − ∈ Fr(E ]0,ra ] ), son diviseur Div( f ) = α∈C a vα ( f )[α] est
aussi égal à Div( f + ) − Div( f − ).
Lemme 8.72. Si f ∈ E ]0,ra ] est non nul, il existe g ∈ L{{t}} tel que
f −1 E ]0,ra ] ∩ Fr(L{{t}}) = g −1 L{{t}}.
Démonstration. Soit D le diviseur v p (T )>0 n α [α], où
n α = inf {v(1+α)ζ −1 ( f ), ζ ∈ μ p∞ , v p ((1 + α)ζ − 1) ≤ ra } .
Par construction, D est invariant par μ p∞ (où ζ ∈ μ p ∞ agit par α → (1 + α)
ζ − 1), et est localement fini car on a n α ≤ vα ( f ), si v p (α) ≤ ra . Il existe donc
g ∈ L{{t}} dont D est le diviseur, et il est facile de voir que tout élément de
L{{t}} divise g s’il divise f . On en déduit le résultat.
ψ(a)
(ii) ψ( f ) = b ne dépend pas de l’écriture choisie.
Démonstration. Comme Fr(R) = ∪a≥1 Fr(E ]0,ra ] ), on peut écrire f sous la
+
forme f = f {0} ff − , et le (iii) du lemme 8.73 fournit une écriture sous la forme
voulue avec a = f {0} f + NR + /ϕ(R + ) f − / f − et b = ϕ −1 (NR + /ϕ(R + ) f − ).
Si f = ϕ(b) = ϕ(b
) , on a aϕ(b ) = a ϕ(b) et donc ψ(a)b = ψ(a )b, ce
a a
Il s’ensuit que si α∈Ca−n n α [α] est le diviseur de ψ n ( f ) sur Ca−n (avec
n α = vα (ψ n (g))−vα (h)), celui de f est α∈Ca−n β∈Ca , (1+β) pn =1+α n α [β].
Il est clair sur cette expression que ce diviseur est Ca -stable par μ p n .
Théorème 8.77. ∩n∈N ϕ n (Fr(R)) = Fr(L{{t}}).
Démonstration. Soit f ∈ ∩n∈N ϕ n (Fr(R)). Il existe a ≥ 1 tel que f ∈
Fr(E ]0,ra ] ), et il résulte du lemme 8.76 que Div( f ) est Ca -stable par μ p∞ .
Il existe donc g ∈ Fr(L{{t}}) tel que Div(g) = Div( f ) (cf. lemme 8.69). Cela
signifie que gf ∈ (E ]0,ra ] )∗ ⊂ R. Par ailleurs, ϕ est bijectif sur Fr(L{{t}}) puis-
f
qu’il l’est sur L{{t}}. Il s’ensuit, grâce au lemme 8.75, que g ∈ ∩n∈N ϕ n (R),
f
et donc, grâce à la prop. 8.68, que g ∈ L{{t}}. On en déduit le résultat.
noyaux des 1 − ϕ n ψ n , pour n ∈ N), son image par l’application qui à x associe
les coordonnées de gx dans la base e1 , . . . , e j est fermée dans (E ]0,ra ] ) j et est
incluse dans (L{{t}}) j par construction de g. Comme la topologie de L{{t}}
induite par celle de E ]0,ra ] est sa topologie naturelle, on en déduit que cette
image est fermée dans (L{{t}}) j , et comme c’est un L{{t}}-module, il en ré-
sulte qu’elle est libre de rang j sur L{{t}}. On en déduit que Ma est libre de
rang j sur L{{t}} et on peut donc supposer que e1 , . . . , e j est une base de Ma
sur L{{t}}.
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 333
tout a ∈ Z∗p .
Si x w(s) δ2 = δ1 , alors t w(s) e2 a un relèvement e2 dans "(s) (unique à
addition près d’un multiple de e1 ), vérifiant ϕ(e2 ) = p w(s) δ2 ( p)e2 + e1 et
σa (e2 ) = a w(s) δ2 (a)e2 , pour tout a ∈ Z∗p .
(i) Si " possède un vecteur propre pour les actions de ϕ et , alors " est
triangulable.
ng
(ii) Si s ∈ S∗ ∪ S∗st les seuls vecteurs propres (à multiplication près par un
élément de L ∗ ) de "(s) pour les actions de ϕ et sont les t k e1 (propre
pour x k δ1 ), pour k ∈ N ; c’est aussi le cas si s ∈ S∗cris est exceptionnel.
(iii) Si s ∈ S∗cris n’est pas exceptionnel, les seuls vecteurs propres de "(s)
pour les actions de ϕ et sont les t k e1 (propre pour x k δ1 ), pour k ∈ N,
et les t k e2 (propre pour x k+w(s) δ2 ), pour k ∈ N.
334 Pierre Colmez
Maintenant, les seuls sous-(ϕ, )-modules de R(δ) sont les t k R(δ), pour
k ∈ N (cf. prop. 8.33). On en déduit que les seuls vecteurs propres (à multipli-
cation près par un élément de L ∗ ) de R(δ1 ) pour les actions de ϕ et sont les
t k e1 , pour k ∈ N. De plus, si v ∈
/ Re1 est propre pour ϕ et , il en est de même
de son image dans R(δ2 ) qui est donc de la forme αt i e2 , avec α ∈ L ∗ ; autre-
ment dit, il existe i ∈ N, tel que t i e2 admette un relèvement propre pour ϕ et .
D’après [10, lemme 4.9], cela implique que s ∈ S∗cris n’est pas exceptionnel
et que v est un multiple de t k e2 , avec k ∈ N.
On en déduit le résultat.
(i) Si " n’est pas triangulable, alors " {0} = 0 et donc (" {0})0 = 0.
ng
(ii) Si s = (δ1 , δ2 , L ) ∈ S∗ S∗st , alors ("(s) {0})0 = L e1 .
(iii) Si s = (δ1 , δ2 , L ) ∈ S∗cris , alors ("(s) {0})0 = L e1 ⊕ L e2 .
ϕ( f ) = p k δ1 ( p) f + αt k e1 et σa ( f ) = a k δ1 (a) f + βt k e1 , si a ∈ Z∗p .
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 335
p−1
ψ( i=0 (1 + T )i ϕ(xi )) = x0 . On utilise ces données pour associer à " un
faisceau U → " U sur Z p (où U décrit les ouverts compacts a bde
Z p ),
+ +
équivariant sous l’action de P , où P agit sur Z p par la formule 0 1 · x =
ax + b habituelle. De manière précise:
0 1
• 10 · z = (z 2 , z 1 ).
• Si a ∈ Q∗p , alors a0 a0 · z = (ω" (a)z 1 , ω" (a)z 2 ).
−1
• Si a ∈ Z∗p , alors a0 01 · z = ( a0 01 z 1 , ω" (a) a 0 10 z 2 ).
• Si z = 0p 01 · z, alors Res pZ p z = 0p 01 · z 1 et ResZ p wz = ω" ( p)ψ(z 2 ).
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 337
• Si b ∈ pZ p , et si z = 10 b1 · z, alors(5)
ResZ p z = 10 b1 · z 1 et Res pZ p wz = u b (Res pZ p (z 2 )),
(1+b)−2 b(1+b)−1
où u b = ω" (1 + b) 10 −1 1 ◦ w" ◦ 0 1
◦ w" ◦ 10 1/(1+b)
1
sur " pZ p .
4.1.2. Dualité
ˇ = HomR (", R dT ) le dual de Tate de ". On définit un accouplement
Soit " 1+T
ˇ P1 ) × (" P1 ), en posant
G-équivariant { , }P1 sur ("
{x, y}P1 = {ResZ p x, ResZ p y} + {ResZ p 0p 01 x, ResZ p 0p 01 y},
ˇ P1 → (") ⊗ ω−1 → 0,
0 → (")∗ → " "
Démonstration. On a
a 0 −1 −1 1 0 −1
0 d · (w · (v ⊗ ω" )) = ω" (a) 0 d/a w · (v ⊗ ω" )
−1 −1
= ω" (a)w · d/a
0 1
0
· (v ⊗ ω" )
−1 −1 −1
= ω" (a)w · (δω" (d/a) v ⊗ ω" )
−1 −1
= δ −1 (a) δω" (d)(w · (v ⊗ ω" )),
si s ∈ S∗cris ). On a donc {e, W }P1 = αen {e, W }P1 , pour tout n, et comme W
est compact, {e, W }P1 est borné et ∩n∈N αen {e, W }P1 = 0, ce qui permet de
conclure.
Théorème 8.87. (i) Si " n’est pas triangulable, alors J ∗ ( (")) = 0.
(ii) Si s ∈ S∗ − (S∗ ∩ S∗HT ) ou si s ∈ S∗st , alors J ∗ ((s)an ) = L f 1 .
ng ng
caractère δ1−1 ⊗ δ2−1 χ. On en déduit, grâce aux rem. .8.51 et 8.50, / 1 ,
que
envoyant z sur φ1,z : Q p → L définie par φ1,z (x) = f 1 , −1 0 1 ·z
x P1
, est
G-équivariante de "(s) P1 dans B an (δ2 , δ1 ).
Lemme 8.90. L’application 1 : "(s) P1 → B an (δ2 , δ1 ) est surjec-
tive et son noyau est l’ensemble des z vérifiant ps (ResZ p z) ∈ R + e2 et
ps (ResZ p 0p 01 z) ∈ R + e2 .
0 1 −1 0 1 −x
Démonstration. On a −1 x = w 0 1 0 1 , et donc
. 0 −1
−1 0 1 −x /
φ1,z (x) = w −1 0 1 · (e1 ⊗ ωs ), w 0 1 0 1 · z P1
. /
= e1 ⊗ ωs−1 , 10 −x1 · z P1 .
R + ()-module R + e2 Z∗p , qui est de rang fini (et même de rang 1), elle est
nulle, ce qui démontre le (i).
Enfin, comme Re1 est stable par P + et ψ et Re1 Z∗p est stable par w"(s) ,
il résulte des formules du squelette d’action que Re1 P1 est stable par G
(cf. [14, prop. V.2.8] pour des résultats du même genre).
Ceci permet de conclure.
le (i) du lemme permet de munir Re2 Z∗p d’une action de w"(s) , et donc de
définir un module Re2 P1 . Les formules du squelette d’action passent alors
au quotient modulo Re1 P1 , et donc munissent Re2 P1 d’une action de G,
rendant G-équivariante l’application naturelle ps : "(s) P1 → Re2 P1 .
Ceci prouve le (i) du th. 8.90.
Si i = 1, 2, on note R + ei P1 l’ensemble des z ∈ Rei P1 vérifiant
ResZ p z ∈ R + ei et ResZ p 0p 01 z ∈ R + ei .
R + ei P1 ∼
= B an (δ3−i , δi )∗ ⊗ωs et (Rei P1 )/(R + ei P1 ) ∼
= B an (δi , δ3−i ).
Démonstration. R + e2 P1 est l’image de Ker 1 par ps ; on en déduit sa
stabilité par G. De plus, (Re2 P1 )/(R + e2 P1 ) est isomorphe à l’image
de 1 , c’est-à-dire B an (δ2 , δ1 ).
{x1 e1 + x2 ê2 , x1 e1 + x2 e2 } = rés0 x1 x2 − x2 x1 1+T
dT
si x1 , x2 , x1 , x2 ∈ R).
Cette dualité induit donc des dualités G-équivariantes entre Rei P1 et
Re3−i P1 dans laquelle R + ei P1 et R + e3−i P1 sont les orthogonaux
+ +
l’un de l’autre (car R est l’orthogonal de R dans R). On en déduit que
R + ei P1 est le dual de (Re3−i
P1 )/(R + e3−i P1 ) est donc est isomorphe
−1 ∗ ∼ an
à B an (χ δi−1 , χ δ3−i ) = B (δ3−i , δi )∗ ⊗ ωs .
Cela permet de conclure.
Remarque 8.93. (i) Si δ, ω sont deux caractères continus de Q∗p , on peut
construire des représentations E (δ) ω P1 et R(δ) ω P1 en reprenant la
stratégie menant à la construction de D P1 et Drig P1 dans le cas où D
est de rang 2 sur E . La représentation Rei P1 de la prop. 8.92 est alors
isomorphe à R(δi ) ωs P1 .
(ii) Si D est irréductible de rang ≥ 3, on peut encore définir le G-module
D ω P1 (cf. [14, § II.1]), mais la stratégie menant à la construction de
Drig ω P1 est en défaut. Les résultats de Paskunas [29] laissent à penser
qu’il n’est pas possible de munir Drig P1 d’une action de G.
∼ −1 =
en forment donc une base L. Par ailleurs, W (δ1 , δ2 ) = Wk ⊗ δ1 χ
a 0sur
Wk ⊗ x δ2 , et comme 0 1 agit par multiplication par δ2 (a) sur e2 , on voit
k
pn −1
δ2 ( p)n i=0 1i+ pn Z p = δ2 ( p)n 1Z p ; il en résulte, puisque v p (δ2 ) < 0,
que l’image de 1Z p dans le complété universel de B alg (δ2 , δ1 ) est nulle, et
donc que ce complété universel est nul puisque B alg (δ2 , δ1 ) est irréductible.)
• Si δs = x k , avec k ∈ N (ce qui couvre le cas s ∈ S st et le cas s ∈ S cris
spécial), alors (s) est une extension de B(δ2 , δ1 ) par E ! ⊗δ1 χ −1 , où E ! est
l’extension de Wk par X k correspondant à ! ∈ Hom(Q∗p , L) (cf. th. 8.55). On
est donc ramené à démontrer le résultat suivant (on rappelle que Symk ⊗δ2 =
Wk ⊗ δ2 x k = Wk ⊗ δ1 χ −1 ).
alg alg
Lemme 8.96. E ! = St ⊗ Wk sauf si ! = v p où E ! est une extension non
triviale de Wk par St⊗Wk et donc est isomorphe à (Indlisse (|x|⊗|x|−1 ) ⊗ Wk .
B (x
an w(s) δ2 , x −w(s) δ1 ) qui est surjectif pour les mêmes raisons que z → φ1,z .
Or on a f 1 = w · (t −w(s) e1 ⊗ ωs−1 ), ce qui nous donne
348 Pierre Colmez
. /
φ1,z (x) = (−1)w(s) ωs−1 δ1 (−1) t −w(s) e1 ⊗ ωs−1 , 10 −x
1 z P1
. /
= ωs−1 δ1 (−1) e1 ⊗ ωs−1 , t −w(s) 10 −x
1 z P1
. d −w(s) 1 −x /
= ωs−1 δ1 (−1) e1 ⊗ ωs−1 , 0 1 z P1
dx
d −w(s)
= φ1,z (x).
dx
Il s’ensuit que z → φ1,z s’obtient en composant z → φ
1,z avec le morphisme
d −w(s) w(s) −w(s)
dx : B (δ2 , δ1 ) → B (x
an an δ2 , x δ1 ) de la proposition 8.54.
Il est à noter que l’extension de B alg (δ2 , δ1 ) (noyau de ce morphisme) par
B an (δ1 , δ2 ) qui apparaît n’est pas scindée (cf. démonstration du th. 8.95).
&
(Ss,g·U (g · μ))(x) =ωs (ad − bc) δs (z − x) g · μ(z)
g·U
&
= δ2 (ad − bc) δs (cz + d)δs az+b
cz+d − x μ(z)
U
&
= δs δ2 (ad − bc)δs −cx+a ad−bc δs z − −cx+a
d x−b
μ(z)
U
−1
=(Ss,U (μ) 6 g )(x),
Par ailleurs, ResZ p ẽ2 est un relèvement de e2 dans "(s), et comme l’exten-
sion est supposée normalisée on en déduit, grâce au (i) de la prop. 8.99, qu’il
existe φ ∈ LA(Z p ) telle que l’on ait φe2 = δs + φ sur Z p . Il en résulte que
φ = 0 et φe2 (1) = 1, ce qui permet de conclure.
g = c d , on obtient
a b
&
(Ss,g·U (g · μ))(x) = ωs (ad − bc) (z − x)k !(z − x) g · μ(z)
g·U
&
k az+b
= δ2 (ad − bc) (cz + d)k az+b cz+d − x ! cz+d − x μ(z)
U
k
= (ad − bc) δ2 (ad − bc) −cx+a
k
ad−bc
&
d x−b k az+b
z − −cx+a ! cz+d − x μ(z)
U
= (Ss,U (μ) 6g −1 )(x),
la dernière identité venant de ce que ! az+bcz+d − x = ! z − −cx+a + !(−cx
d x−b
B an (δ1 , δ2 )∗0 dont les translaté sous l’action de G (et même de N ) engendrent
k
topologiquement B an (δ1 , δ2 )∗0 . Soit donc ẽ2 un relèvement de e2 − w · tk! e2 .
On définit, comme ci-dessus, une fonction φ2 , localement analytique sur Q∗p ,
et on cherche à prouver que son image modulo les polyômes de degré ≤ k
est x k !. Pour les mêmes raisons que ci-dessus,
on a a0 01 − δ2 (a) · φ2 = 0
dans Stan (δ1 , δ2 ), ce qui signifie que a0 01 − δ2 (a) · φ2 est un polyôme de
degré ≤ k, et donc que φ2 est de la forme x k ! (x)+ P(x), où ! ∈ Hom(Q∗p , L)
et P est un polyôme de degré ≤ k. On en déduit le résultat, comme dans le cas
générique, en utilisant le fait que ResZ p ẽ2 est un relèvement de e2 dans "(s),
et donc que la restriction de φ2 à Z p est de la forme x k ! + φ, où φ ∈ LA(Z p ).
1
Remarque 8.102. La transformation μ → U z−x μ(z) (qui correspondrait
au cas δs = x −1 , interdit par l’hypothèse s ∈ Sirr ), est la transformée de
Stieljes [23] : son image est l’espace des φ : c U → L qui sont la restriction
d’une fonction analytique sur P1 (C p ) − U , nulle en ∞.
Si n = 0, 1, 2, on obtient:
d1 c(g) = (g − 1) · c, si c ∈ M = C 0 (G + , M),
d2 c(g0 , g1 ) = g0 · c(g1 ) − c(g0 g1 ) + c(g0 ),
d3 (g0 , g1 , g2 ) = g0 · c(g1 , g2 ) − c(g0 g1 , g2 ) + c(g0 , g1 g2 ) − c(g0 , g1 ).
A.2. Dualité
Dans tout ce qui suit, on suppose que la topologie sur M ∗ est telle que
l’application naturelle M → (M ∗ )∗ est un isomorphisme.
• Entre H j (± , M) et H 1− j (∓ , M ∗ ).
Notons − = ψ N le semi-groupe opposé de + . Si M est un L-espace
vectoriel topologique, muni d’une action de + , alors ψ − 1 est le transposé
de ϕ − 1. Il s’ensuit que Ker(ψ − 1) et Im(ϕ − 1) sont orthogonaux, ainsi que
354 Pierre Colmez
c(g −1 ), c (h 1 h 2 ) − c (h 1 ) − c (h 2 )−c(h −1 −1 −1 −1
2 h 1 ) − c(h 1 ) − c(h 2 ), c (g)
= c(g −1 ), (h 1 − 1) · c (h 2 ) − (h −1 −1
2 − 1) · c(h 1 ), c (g)
= (h −1 −1 −1
1 − 1) · c(g ), c (h 2 ) − c(h 1 ), (h 2 − 1) · c (g).
H j (A− , M ∗ ) ∼
= H 2− j (A+ , M)∗ et H j (A+ , M)
∼
= H 2− j (A− , M ∗ )∗ , pour j = 0, 1, 2.
Démonstration. La première hypothèse implique que H j (+ , M) et
H 1− j (− , M ∗ ) sont séparés et duaux l’un de l’autre, si j = 0, 1 ; la seconde
implique alors que H i (A0 , H j (+ , M)) et H 1−i (A0 , H 1− j (− , M ∗ )) sont
duaux l’un de l’autre, si i = 0, 1 et j = 0, 1, pour l’accouplement , A0 .
Références
[1] L. B ERGER, Équations différentielles p-adiques et (ϕ, N )-modules filtrés. Asté-
risque 319 (2008), 13–38.
[2] L. B ERGER et C. B REUIL, Sur quelques représentations potentiellement cristal-
lines de GL2 (Q p ), Astérisque 330 (2010), 155–211.
[3] L. B ERGER et P. C OLMEZ, Familles de représentations de de Rham et monodro-
mie p-adique, Astérisque 319 (2008), 303–337.
La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ) 357
Abstract
Using differential techniques, we compute the Jacquet module of the
locally analytic vectors of irreducible admissible unitary representations
of GL2 (Q p ).
1. Introduction
Le but de cet article est d’étudier le module de Jacquet des GL2 (Q p ) représen-
tations de Banach unitaires admissibles, absolument irréductibles. On retrouve
les résultats de [7], mais les méthodes sont sensiblement différentes.
1.1. Notations
On fixe une extension finie L de Q p et on note R l’anneau de Robba à coef-
ficients dans L, i.e. l’anneau des séries de Laurent n∈Z an T n , avec an ∈ L,
qui convergent sur une couronne de type 0 < v p (T ) ≤ r , où r > 0 dépend de
la série.
Soit χ : Gal(Q p /Q p ) → Z∗p le caractère cyclotomique. Il induit un isomor-
phisme de = Gal(Q p (μ p∞ )/Q p ) sur Z∗p et on note a → σa son inverse.
On munit R d’une action de et d’un Frobenius ϕ, en posant (σa f )(T ) =
f ((1 + T )a − 1) et (ϕ f )(T ) = f ((1 + T ) p − 1). Soit ∇ = lima→1 σa−1 a −1
l’action infinitésimale de . Explicitement, on a ∇( f ) = t (1 + T ) f (T ), où
t = log(1 + T ).
Si δ : Q∗p → L ∗ est un caractère continu, on note R(δ) le R-module li-
bre de rang 1 ayant une base e (dite canonique) telle que ϕ(e) = δ( p)e et
Automorphic Forms and Galois Representations, ed. Fred Diamond, Payman L. Kassaei and
Minhyong Kim. Published by Cambridge University Press.
c Cambridge University Press 2014.
359
360 Gabriel Dospinescu
Théorème 9.1. Soient V et comme dans 1.2. Alors J ∗ (an ) est un L-espace
vectoriel de dimension au plus 2 et il est non nul si et seulement si V est
trianguline.
Ce théorème est aussi démontré dans [7, th. 0.1], en utilisant l’action de ϕ
sur Drig . Notre approche est orthogonale (elle utilise l’action infinitésimale de
au lieu de celle de ϕ) et plus directe: si u + désigne l’action infinitésimale de
1 Tous les duaux que l’on considère dans cet article sont topologiques.
362 Gabriel Dospinescu
Ce résultat est démontré dans [7, th. 4.6], ainsi que dans [14] (prop. 6.8)
par des méthodes différentes. Il permet de donner [7, th.07] une description
complète de la représentation an (en particulier, de montrer qu’elle est de
longueur finie et d’en trouver les constituants de Jordan-Hölder), confirmant
ainsi des conjectures de Berger, Breuil et Emerton [2, 10].
converge dans D (mais pas dans D † ) et sa limite w D (z) appartient à D †,ψ =0 . L’extension de
ψ=0
w D à Drig se fait en utilisant la densité de D † dans Drig .
4 On note dans la suite IndG (δ ⊗ δ ) l’espace des fonctions localement analytiques
B 1 2
f : GL2 (Q p ) → L telles que f a b g = δ (a)δ (d) f (g) pour tous a, d ∈ Q∗ , b ∈ Q
0d 1 2 p p
et g ∈ GL2 (Q p ).
364 Gabriel Dospinescu
1.6. Remerciements
Ce travail est une partie de ma thèse de doctorat, réalisée sous la direction de
Pierre Colmez et de Gaëtan Chenevier. Je leur suis profondément reconnaissant
pour des nombreuses discussions que nous avons eues et pour leurs tout aussi
nombreuses suggestions. Je voudrais aussi remercier R. Taylor, X. Caruso et
L. Berger pour m’avoir invité à exposer ces résultats à l’I.A.S, dans le cadre
du Workshop on Galois Representations and Automorphic Forms, et à l’E.N.S
Lyon, dans le cadre de la conférence “Théorie de Hodge p-adique, équations
différentielles p-adiques et leurs applications”. Merci aussi à Andrea Pulita
pour une discussion qui m’a permis de simplifier une démonstration et à Ramla
Abdellatif, qui m’a grandement aidé à améliorer la rédaction. Enfin, merci au
rapporteur pour des remarques utiles.
2. Le module de Jacquet de an
2.1. Un résultat de finitude
On démontre un résultat de finitude pour les équations différentielles p-adiques
attachées aux représentations galoisiennes. Rappelons [1, V.1] que si V est une
L-représentation de Gal(Q p /Q p ) et si Drig est son (ϕ, )-module sur R, alors
l’action de peut se dériver, d’où une connexion ∇ = lima→1 σa−1 a −1
sur Drig ,
au-dessus de la connexion ∇ sur R (introduite dans 1.1). Si P ∈ L[X ], notons
P(∇)=0
Drig = {z ∈ Drig |P(∇)(z) = 0}.
Démonstration. On peut écrire z = z 1 + w · (ϕ ◦ ψ(z 2 )), où w = 01 10 et où
l’on voit Drig comme sous-espace de Drig P1 comme dans 1.2. On a donc
u + (z) = u + (z 1 ) + w · u − (ϕ(ψ(z 2 )))
et le résultat découle alors de [8, th. 1].
D’après la proposition 9.5, le L-espace vectoriel
X = {z ∈ Drig |(∇ − a)(∇ − b)z = 0}
est de dimension au plus 4 (on fera mieux par la suite). Comme X est stable
par ϕ, on a X ⊂ ϕ(Drig ), de telle sorte que (0, z) ∈ Drig P1 pour tout z ∈ X .
Rappelons aussi que les vecteurs localement analytiques an de vivent dans
une suite exacte de GL2 (Q p )-modules topologiques
0 → (an )∗ ⊗ δ D → Drig P1 → an → 0.
Proposition 9.9. On a une égalité de sous-L-espaces vectoriels de Drig P1
J ∗ (an ) ⊗ δ D = {(0, z)|z ∈ X }.
En particulier, J ∗ (an ) est de dimension au plus 4 sur L.
Démonstration. Soit π = an . L’inclusion π ∗ ⊗ δ D ⊂ Drig P1 induit une
inclusion
+ =0
J ∗ (π ) ⊗ δ D ⊂ (Drig P1 )U ⊂ (Drig P1 )u
et, d’après la proposition 9.8, on a
+ =0
(Drig P1 )u = {(0, z)|z ∈ X }.
La proposition 9.5 montre alors que dim L J ∗ (π ) ≤ 4.
Montrons maintenant que les inclusions précédentes sont des égalités. Nous
aurons besoin du résultat suivant, qui montre en particulier que (Drig P1 )U =
+
(Drig P1 )u =0 .
Lemme
Z 9.10. Soit M une L-représentation localement analytique de
p Q p . Si M u + =0 est de dimension finie sur L, alors M u + =0 = M U .
0 1
+
n
Démonstration. Il existe n tel que M u =0 soit invariant par 10 p 1Z p . Si m ∈
+ =0
Mu et a ∈ Q p , on a alors pour tout k ≥ n − v p (a)
pk 0 1 a m = 1 pk a pk 0 m = pk 0 m,
0 1 01 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 a
donc 0 1 m = m. Cela permet de conclure.
Equations différentielles et modules de Jacquet 367
(a) Si Drig possède un vecteur propre pour les actions de ϕ et , alors V est
trianguline.
ng
(b) Si V correspond à un point s ∈ S∗st ∪ S∗ ou si s ∈ S∗cris est ex-
ceptionnel, alors les vecteurs propres pour l’action de ϕ et sont dans
∪k≥0 L ∗ · t k e1 .
(c) Si V correspond à un point s ∈ S∗cris non exceptionnel, les vecteurs
propres pour ϕ et sont dans L ∗ · t k e1 ou dans L ∗ · t k e2 pour un k ≥ 0.
Le lemme suivant sera utilisé constamment dans la suite. Il fournit aussi une
démonstration très directe de la proposition 1.19 de [7].
3. L’involution w D
ψ=0
On décrit l’involution w D sur Drig dans le cas où V est trianguline et on
démontre le théorème 9.3.
3.1. Le module R δ P1
Soit δ : Q∗p → L ∗ un caractère continu. Rappelons que R ψ=0 est libre de rang
1 sur8 R(), de base 1 + T (cela découle de [5, cor. V.1.13]). L’involution
i δ de L[] qui envoie σa sur δ(a)σ 1 se prolonge de manière unique en une
a
involution i δ de R() ([5, lemme V.2.3]) et on définit wδ ( f · (1 + T )) =
i δ ( f ) · (1 + T ) si f ∈ R(). Cela fournit une involution continue sur R ψ=0
telle que pour toute distribution μ sur Z∗p on ait
& &
wδ (1 + T )x μ = wδ σx μ · (1 + T ) =
Z∗p Z∗p
& &
1
δ(x)σ 1 μ · (1 + T ) = δ(x)(1 + T ) x μ.
Z∗p x Z∗p
Donc l’involution wδ que l’on vient de définir coïncide avec celle définie dans
1.5.
Soit LA(P1 (δ)) l’espace
des fonctions localement analytiques φ : Q p → L
telles que x → δ(x)φ 1
se prolonge en une fonction localement analytique,
x
muni de l’action définie par (où g = ac db )
ax + b
(g −1 · φ)(x) = δ(cx + d)φ .
cx + d
Un exercice standard de la théorie des induites paraboliques identifie
−1 à LA(P1 (δ)) (en tant que GL (Q )-modules topologiques).
IndGB (1, δ) ⊗ δ 2 p
L’application qui envoie μ sur ResZ p (μ), ResZ p (w · μ) composée avec
l’isomorphisme d’Amice9 identifie le dual de LA(P1 (δ)) (comme espace
vectoriel topologique) à
L’espace R + δ P1 est ainsi muni d’une action de GL2 (Q p ). Cette action est
donnée par des formules explicites comme dans [5, II.1] (voir aussi [7, 4.1]).
Ces formules permettent de prolonger l’action de GL2 (Q p ) à R δ P1 (défini
de la même manière que R + δ P1 , en remplaçant R + par R).
8 L’anneau R() est défini par R() = () ⊗ −1 2
(2 ) R(2 ), où 2 = χ (1 + p Z p ),
(G) est l’algèbre des mesures à valeurs dans O L sur le groupe de Lie p-adique G et R(2 )
est défini comme l’anneau R, en remplaçant la variable T par γ − 1, pour n’importe quel
générateur topologique γ de 2 .
9 Cet isomorphisme identifie R + à l’espace des distributions sur Z via la transformée
p
d’Amice μ → n≥0 Z p nx μ · T n .
Equations différentielles et modules de Jacquet 371
Démonstration. Commençons par définir les morphismes dans cette suite ex-
acte. L’application i de R δ D ·δ−2 P1 dans Drig P1 envoie ( f 1 , f 2 ) sur
1
( f 1 · e1 , δ1 (−1) f 2 · e1 ). L’application de Drig P1 dans R δ D ·δ −2 P1 envoie
2
(A1 · e1 + B1 · ϕ(ê2 ), A2 · e1 + B2 · ϕ(ê2 )) sur (B1 , δ2 (−1)B2 ), où Ai , Bi ∈ R
(ê2 ∈ Drig est un relèvement fixé de e2 ). Le fait que ces applications i et pr sont
bien définies et induisent une suite exacte d’espaces vectoriels topologiques
est une conséquence immédiate des propositions 9.17 et 9.19. La GL2 (Q p )-
équivariance (à torsion par δ1 , resp. δ2 près) suit des propositions 9.17 et 9.19,
du fait que f → f · e1 et ps sont des morphismes de (ϕ, )-modules et des
Equations différentielles et modules de Jacquet 373
Il faut travailler un peu plus [7] pour déterminer les extensions entre les
constituants de Jordan-Hölder.
Références
[1] L. Berger-Représentations p-adiques et équations différentielles, Invent. Math.
148 (2002), 219–284.
[2] L. Berger, C. Breuil-Sur quelques représentations potentiellement cristallines de
G Q p , Astérisque 330 (2010), 155–211.
[3] F. Cherbonnier et P. Colmez-Représentations p-adiques surconvergentes, Invent.
Math. 133 (1998), 581–611.
[4] P. Colmez-Représentations triangulines de dimension 2, Astérisque 319 (2008),
213–258.
[5] P. Colmez-Représentations de GL2 (Q p ) et (ϕ, )-modules, Astérisque 330
(2010), 281–509.
[6] P. Colmez-La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ), Astérisque 330 (2010),
213–262.
[7] P. Colmez-La série principale unitaire de GL2 (Q p ): vecteurs localement analy-
tiques, ce volume.
374 Gabriel Dospinescu